Chrysler 2005 Sebring

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ▫ Partial Zero Emission Vehicle (PZEV) For 2.4L —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and known to the State of California to cause cancer and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. known to the State of California to cause cancer and
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored birth defects or other reproductive harm.
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
aware of all safety warnings. Consult the table of contents to determine which section
When it comes to service, remember that your manufac- contains the information you desire.
turer’s dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory- The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is complete listing of all subjects.
interested in your satisfaction.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used throughout this owner’s
manual:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on a stamped
plate on the left front corner on the body of the vehicle,
visible through the windshield. This number also ap-
pears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label Vehicle Identification Number
affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label as a
convenient record of your vehicle identification number
and optional equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 7
Partial Zero Emission Vehicle (PZEV) for 2.4L — If VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
Equipped 1
NOTE: If the 8th digit of the vehicle identification WARNING!
number (VIN) contains a ⬙J⬙ then your vehicle is
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
equipped with the Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV)
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
package.
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
NOTE: There are specific instructions regarding when injury or death.
to change the ignition cables and spark plugs with the
PZEV package. Please refer to the Maintenance Sched-
ules section in your owner’s manual for specific mainte-
nance instructions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Central Locking — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Door Ajar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .12 ▫ Automatic (Rolling) Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Automatic Unlock On Exit — Only Available If
Automatic Door Locks Are Enabled . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ “Child Protection” Door Lock System
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . .19
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Unlock The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

▫ To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .48
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
2
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Positions

Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the
gearshift knob push button has returned to the out
position. Turn the key to the Lock position and remove
the key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place

CAUTION!
the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-
rarily in the key cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
clockwise slightly, then remove the key as described. If a remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
malfunction occurs, the system may trap the key in the when leaving the vehicle unattended.
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
WARNING! PARK unless the key is in the OFF or RUN positions.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger- Key-In-Ignition Reminder
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others could Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch and is in the OFF, LOCK, or ACC position, sounds a
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector signal to remind you to remove the key.
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED occurs, remove the Sentry Key from the key ring and
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key restart the vehicle. Pagers, cell phones, walkmans, etc.,
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics have no effect on this system.
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue
The Theft Alarm Light, located on the instrument cluster
2
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal the
to the right of the fuel gauge, will illuminate for about 3
vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds then shut off. The
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the On
system will allow the engine to be started and run (for 2
position. If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid
seconds) up to six times after which the starter motor will
signal from the ignition key, the theft alarm light will
be disabled and the engine will not crank.
flash continuously to signal that the vehicle has been
NOTE: immobilized. If the Theft Alarm Light remains On during
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible vehicle operation, it indicates a fault in the system
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems electronics.
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
security protection.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
• Additional Sentry Keys or Mobil Speed Pass™ devices
Replacement Keys
held too close to the ignition key when starting the
vehicle may cause problems when attempting to start NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
the vehicle. These devices cannot damage the Sentry vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
Key System, but can cause a momentary problem a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
when attempting to start the engine. If a problem not be programmed to any other vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided Turn the ignition Off and remove the second key.
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
the ignition On within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds a
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light will stop
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
programmed. process to program up to a total of 8 keys.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced, General Information
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer. The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two 1. this device may not cause harmful interference
valid keys by doing the following:
2. this device must accept any interference that may be
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the received, including interference that may cause undes-
ignition On for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 ired operation
seconds.
Turn the ignition Off and remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition On
within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime will sound
and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM WARNING!

The interior lights will come on when you open any door,
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry (if so When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
equipped) or central unlock (if so equipped). They will from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not 2
remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
then fade to off. access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
The lights also will turn off if you turn on the ignition
ries and death.
after you close all doors.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive and
when you park and leave the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Door Locks

There is a door lock switch on each front door trim panel
located to the front of the door handle. Press this switch
to lock or unlock the four doors.
Door Lock Plunger

If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure that the keys are
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Power Door Lock Switch
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the until you pull up the lock plungers.
ignition switch, and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Central Locking — If Equipped The Automatic Door Locks can be disabled or re-enabled
All vehicle doors are locked with the first turn of the key by performing the following procedure:
to the LOCK position. The double activation feature
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
requires you to turn the key in the cylinder lock two 2
times within five seconds to UNLOCK all vehicle doors 2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON/RUN
at once. and back to OFF 4 times ending up in the OFF position.
Door Ajar Warning
If you move the vehicle and a door is not completely
closed, the word DOOR will replace the odometer dis-
play and a chime will sound once. The odometer display
will reappear once the door is closed.
Automatic (Rolling) Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically, as programmed from
the factory, if:
1. The transaxle is in gear,
2. All doors are closed,
Ignition Key Position
3. Vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h),
4. The accelerator pedal is depressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors. 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON/RUN
and back to OFF 4 times ending up in the OFF position.
3. Depress the power door lock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
“Child Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors)
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the
Power Door Lock Switch “child-protection” door lock system.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the To use the system, open each rear door and use a key to
programming. move the control near the door latch UP to the “Engage”
Automatic Unlock on Exit — Only Available if position as shown on the door label. When the system on
Automatic Door Locks are Enabled a door is engaged, that door can be opened only by using
This feature will unlock all the doors when the driver’s the outside door handle. This will occur even though the
door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
position. This function is disabled as delivered from the
factory. Automatic Unlock on Exit can be enabled or
disabled by performing the following procedure:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), lower the
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened 2
from the outside when the child protection locks are REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
engaged. This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
open the trunk from distances up to 23 feet (7 meters)
using a transmitter. You don’t have to point the transmit-
ter at the vehicle to activate the system.
Keyless Entry Transmitter

To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button once to unlock the
driver’s door. Press the button twice within 5 seconds to
Child Lock Control unlock all doors. If your vehicle is equipped with Illumi-
nated Entry, the interior lights also come on and remain
on for about 30 seconds, when you unlock the doors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The system may be programmed to unlock all To lock the doors:
the doors upon the first press of the Unlock button. To The horn will chirp and the headlamps will flash once to
toggle between the first press unlock of the driver’s door acknowledge the lock signal.
to unlock of all doors, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: The horn chirp can be enabled or disabled by
1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmit- the following procedure:
ter.
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4
2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the LOCK
no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Unlock
button.
button.
3. Release both buttons.
The headlights will flash twice to acknowledge the
To unlock the trunk:
unlock signal.
Press and hold the Trunk button on the transmitter to
NOTE: The Lamp Flash can be enabled or disabled by unlatch the trunk.
performing the following procedure:
NOTE: The transmitter can be programmed to unlatch
1. Press and hold the Lock button on the transmitter. the trunk immediately upon activation of the Trunk
button (without pressing and holding) by performing the
2. Continue to hold the Lock button, wait at least 4 but
following procedure:
no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Trunk
button. 1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmit-
ter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4 2. Using a currently programmed transmitter, press the
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the Trunk Unlock button on the transmitter. Continue to hold the
button. Unlock button, wait at least 4 but no longer than 10
seconds, then press and hold the Panic button for at least 2
one second. Release both buttons simultaneously. You
Panic Alarm will hear a chime to signal that you can proceed with
The panic mode unlocks the driver’s door, turns on the programming the new transmitter.
interior lights, flashes the headlights, and sounds the
3. Press and release the Lock and Unlock buttons simul-
horn for about 3 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
taneously, followed by a press and release of ANY button
To use the Panic Alarm: on each new transmitter to be programmed as well as the
Press and hold the Panic Button for at least 1 second to original transmitter. You will hear a chime when a
activate the panic alarm. Press and hold the panic button transmitter has been successfully programmed. You will
a second time or unlock the door with the key (if have 30 seconds to finish programming all new transmit-
equipped with central locking) to deactivate the alarm. ters. A chime will sound when the 30 seconds is over or
The alarm will also shut itself off after 3 minutes, or when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
General Information
To Program Additional Transmitters: This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and
Up to 4 transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle. with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
To program a transmitter, perform the following proce- the following two conditions:
dure:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
1. With the vehicle in Park, turn the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is from one to two years
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement batteries are CR2016. Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
1. Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
object. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
material during removal.
with rubbing alcohol.
3. Reassemble the transmitter case. Snap the halves
together and test transmitter operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM 3. The light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly
The system monitors the doors, trunk, and ignition for for 15 seconds. This shows that the system is arming. If
unauthorized operation. the light comes on but does not flash, the system is still
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
armed, but there is a problem in the trunk circuit. After 15 2
seconds the light will continue to flash slowly. This
up to 18 minutes. For the first three minutes the horn will
shows that the system is fully armed.
sound and the headlights and interior lights will flash.
Then the horn will stop and if the source of the trigger is To disarm the system:
still present, the lights will continue to flash for another Unlock a front door using either the key or the Keyless
15 minutes. Entry Transmitter.
NOTE: The engine will not start until you disarm the Tamper Alert
system. If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
To set the alarm:
alarm had been triggered. Check the vehicle for tamper-
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out ing.
of the vehicle.
Security System Manual Override
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch, The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
the key, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all manual lock control.
doors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE With the ignition ON, the word “deck” will be displayed
in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk
is open. The odometer display will reappear once the
trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed.
With the key in lock position or key out, the “deck” will
be displayed until the trunk is closed.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
Trunk Release Button through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
Use the key or the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
open the trunk from outside the vehicle. From inside the the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
car the trunk lid can be released by depressing the Trunk even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
of the steering wheel. The transmission must be in Park heat stroke.
before the switch will operate. Vehicles with manual
transmissions must be at zero mph for the switch to
work.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Trunk Internal Emergency Release WINDOWS

Power Windows
2
Emergency Release
NOTE: As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emer- Power Window Switches
gency Release lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by
pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the
trunk latching mechanism. See picture.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
tended children, can become entrapped by the windows down, or in certain open or partially open
power windows while operating the power window positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be mini-
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows
or death. open, open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting.
The window controls on the driver’s door operate all OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
windows. Some of the most important safety features in your
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature. vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
window will go down automatically. airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and
To open the window part way, pull the window switch passengers seated next to a window. If you will be
part way and release it when you want the window to carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your seat
stop. belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Please pay close attention to the information in this Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
possible. from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of 2
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
WARNING! inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer Lap/Shoulder Belts
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or Lap/Shoulder Belts.
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
vehicle are buckled up properly. very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
or being thrown out.
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
belts are designed to go around the large bones of go around your lap.
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size. Latch Plate To Buckle
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle collision.
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside sur-
faces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect Removing Slack From Belt
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t allow the belt to retract fully.
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos- WARNING!
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
to your dealer and have it fixed. parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor etc.).
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt position the belt away from your neck.
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
Seat Belt Pretensioners
away from your neck. Push the lever above the webbing
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
2
upward to release the anchorage, and then move it up or
down to the position that serves you best. equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will sioners, both must be replaced.
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
(BeltAlert) 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning (BeltAlert).
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to 2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 Light to turn off.
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled or the
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). The Enhanced
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds
buckled.
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
following these steps:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to Seat Belt Extender
signify that you have successfully completed the pro- If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
gramming. when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can 2
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
vated by repeating this procedure.
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning and store it.
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled. WARNING!
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt positions. Remove and store the extender when not
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. needed.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag window bags to protect the driver and passengers sitting
next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Front Airbag Components

This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of Window Airbag
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com- interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deploy-
partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the ment.
airbag covers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along

with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instru-
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag ment panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may for the driver and front passenger. Left and right window 2
damage the airbags and you could be injured be- airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
cause the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protection.
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating. The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right of collisions. The front airbags deploy only in moderate
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up to severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,
high enough to block the location of the window
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
bag. The area where the window bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions. triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right types of collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the
window bags, do not have any accessory items in- seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags
stalled which will alter the roof, including adding a to protect you properly.
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
up in the rear seat. Infants in rear-facing child restraints
any way.
should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the WARNING!
vehicle seat belt (see section on “Child Restraint”) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
positioning booster seats. severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
Always wear your seat belts even though you
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
have airbags.
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front ment panel during airbag deployment could cause
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
restraint. See the section on “Child Restraint”. the steering wheel or instrument panel.
2. You should read the instructions provided with your • If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
3. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
seat.
4. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
Airbag System Components
5. If your vehicle has left and right window bags, do not The front airbag system consists of the following:
lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into
• Airbag Control Module
the space between you and the door.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• AIRBAG Readiness Light • The airbag control module will not detect rollover or
rear collisions.
• Driver Airbag
• The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
• Passenger Airbag
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
2
• Steering Wheel and Column ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.
These include all of the items listed above except the
• Instrument Panel
knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering
• Interconnecting Wiring wheel and column. If the key is in the “off” position, in
the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are
• Knee Impact Bolsters
not on and will not inflate.
• Left and Right Window Bags Above Side Windows — • The airbag control module also turns on the
If Equipped AIRBAG light in the instrument panel for 6 to
8 seconds when the ignition is first turned on,
• Left and Right Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
then turns the light off. If it detects a malfunction in
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners any part of the system, it turns on the light either
momentarily or continuously.
How The Airbag System Works
• The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate. The control module receives the level of colli-
sion severity, determines the proper level of airbag to
be deployed. The frontal airbag inflators are designed
to provide three different rates of air bag inflation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags
do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel • The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect position you for the best interaction with the front
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays airbag.
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away. If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the airbag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to
• When the airbag control module detects a collision
help restrain the driver and front passenger, and then to
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
immediately deflate.
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. Three levels of airbag inflation rates are NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
possible. These rates are determined by the airbag airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
control module based on collision severity. The airbag not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
covers separate and fold out of the way as the airbags
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in
or all of the following may occur:
about 60 milliseconds. This is only about half of the
time it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and right
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
through a vent hole in the rear of the airbag. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. WARNING!

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-
immediately. sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized 2
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like dealer as soon as possible.
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag Side Airbag System
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, The airbag control module determines if a side collision is
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, severe enough to require the airbag to inflate. The control
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat module receives the level of collision severity from the
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, side impact sensors. The airbag control module will not
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your detect rollover or rear impacts.
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
The side impact SRS Airbags are designed to activate
tions for cleaning.
only in certain side collisions. When the airbag control
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the module detects a collision requiring the window bags to
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
protect you. the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and inflates
(in about the same time it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to Airbag Light
children. The window bag is only about 3 1⁄2 inches (8 3⁄4 You will want to have the airbags ready for your protec-
cm) thick when it is inflated. tion in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
Maintaining Your Airbag System
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
WARNING! • The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
turned on.
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to • The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
protect you. Do not modify the components or interval.
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or • The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or driving.
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc- Child Restraint
ture, or frame. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
• You need proper knee impact protection in a time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket States and all Canadian provinces require that small
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster. children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck- Infants and Child Restraints
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
the rear seats rather than in the front.
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs). Two types
2
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
WARNING! carriers and “convertible” child seats.
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
force required to hold even an infant on your lap to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
could become so great that you could not hold the used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
child’s size. by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the
children from newborn size to the child almost large
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System section.)
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger restraint:
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
infants in this position.
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
WARNING! where you will use it before you buy it.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
collision. The child could be badly injured or weight and height limits.
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be not work when you need it.
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a • Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se- restraint manufacturer’s directions.
vere or fatal injury to the infant. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: For additional information refer to Children Too Large For Booster Seats
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
over the front of the seat when their back is against the 2
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
as possible.
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH — Child slouching can move the belt out of position.
Seat Anchorage System Section.)
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit their back.
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
lap/shoulder belt.
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seat-
structure. ing positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
Please refer to the next section for typical installation
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
instructions.
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower at-
tachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regard-
less of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER LATCH Anchorages
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
System separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward- 2
child restraint systems will be installed as described here. facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
were provided with the child restraint system. hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cushion surfaces. anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
the seat where you are placing the child restraint and
behind each rear seating position located in the
attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
window. These tether strap anchorages are
between the anchor and the child restraint. If your
under a hinged plastic cover with this symbol on it.
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint and, where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and route
the tether strap around the outboard side of the head
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
removing slack in the straps according to the child buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
WARNING! to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
when installing an infant or child restraint. plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally and pull it tight if necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Child restraint tether strap attachment between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
side of the head restraint.
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
2
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path Transporting Pets
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible, injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
route the tether strap under the head restraint and a collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and not an indication of a problem.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
The engine in your new vehicle does not require a long SAFETY TIPS
break-in period.
Exhaust Gas
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 WARNING!
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
detrimental and should be avoided. follow the safety tips below.
The crankcase oil installed in the engine at the factory is
a high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
changes should be consistent with expected climate con- areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
ditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The or out of the area.
recommended viscosity and quality grades are in Section
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
7 of this manual.
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
Do not use non-detergent or straight mineral oils. trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower
at high speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• To avoid drawing exhaust gases into the vehicle, close Defrosters

the trunk while driving. However, if for some reason it Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
must remain open, close all windows. Adjust the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
heating or cooling system to force outside air into the feel the air directed against the windshield. 2
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the the Vehicle
Vehicle
Tires
Seat Belts Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
Safety belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if ing spare) for proper pressure.
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, Lights
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
condition, replace the belt. while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
Airbag Light beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to Fluid Leaks
8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb is not lit water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
during starting, have it replaced. If the light stays on or present, the cause should be corrected immediately.
comes on while driving, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Console Features — Without Heated Seats . . . .54 ▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Console Features — With Heated Seats . . . . . . .55 ▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror— If Equipped . . . . . .56 ▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped . . . .56 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors— If Equipped .57 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .57 䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . .58 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .58 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . .65
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
52 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 䡵 Electronic Speed Control— If Equipped . . . . . .71

▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Automatic Headlights—If Equipped . . . . . . . . .67
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . .67
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Using Speed Control On Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Headlight Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Flash To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Programming The Universal Transceiver . . . . . .75
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ “Rolling Code” Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . .78
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System . . . .69
▫ Reprogramming A Single Button . . . . . . . . . . .78
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
䡵 Traction Control— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 53
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

▫ Opening Sunroof - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Closing Sunroof - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
3
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 䡵 Electrical Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CONSOLE FEATURES The center console/armrest has a pencil /tire gage holder
and a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the
Console Features — Without Heated Seats
cover. The bottom of the console bin also has built in
holders for compact discs or cassette tapes. There are also
two cup holders for rear seat passengers located directly
in the back of the center console.
Two coin holders are located toward the front of the
inside of the console bin. The right side coin holder can
accommodate dimes, nickels or pennies, while the left
side coin holder can hold quarters, dimes, nickels, or
pennies. Both can also accommodate various combina-
tions of different types of coins, including some interna-
tional currencies. The slot on the far left side is not for
coins, but for an optional power outlet, if so equipped.
Console
The front console has two cup holders in the front and a
storage bin. An optional removable ashtray may be
located in the driver’s side cup holder.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Console Features — With Heated Seats The center console/armrest has a pencil /tire gage holder
and a tissue holder mounted on the underside of the
cover. The bottom of the console bin also has built in
holders for compact discs or cassette tapes. The power
outlet is also mounted inside the center console (if
equipped). There are also two cup holders for rear seat 3
passengers and a rear courtesy lamp located directly in
back of the center console.
Two coin holders are located toward the front of the
inside of the console bin. The right side coin holder can
accommodate dimes, nickels or pennies, while the left
side coin holder can hold quarters, dimes, nickels, or
pennies. Both can also accommodate various combina-
Console
tions of different types of coins, including some interna-
The front console has two cup holders. An optional tional currencies.
removable ashtray may be located in the driver’s side cup
holder.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped

This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
Inside Day/Night Mirror— If Equipped
light glare from vehicles behind you. Push in the button
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
on the face of the mirror to activate the dimming feature.
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean. 3
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors— If Equipped

Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the
remote controls mounted on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
Power Mirror Controls
NOTE: Place the mirror selector switch in the center
(neutral) position to prevent accidental movement of the
mirrors.
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
vehicle. mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this
convex mirror.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SEATS Reclining Bucket Seats

The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean
Forward/Rearward back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired normal position. 3
position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
Manual Seat Adjuster the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
After releasing the adjusting bar, apply forward and
rearward body pressure to be sure the seat is latched.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lumbar Support — If Equipped

This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the inboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever forward to increase and rearward to de-
crease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the front switch to move the seat
up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The rear
switch controls the seatback recliner.
Power Seat Switches
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Heated Seats — If Equipped Adjustable Head Restraints

This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats on Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
models equipped with leather seats. The controls for the the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraints so
heated seats are located in the floor console next to the that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise, pull
parking brake. up on the head restraint. To lower, depress the button on
the post guide and push down on the head restraint. 3
Heated Seat Switches

The left rotary switch controls the heat level for the Adjustable Head Restraint
driver’s seat, and the right rotary switch controls the heat
level for the passenger’s seat. These switches feature
several heat settings ranging from 0 to 6.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Folding Rear Seat WARNING!

To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
to fold down either or both seatbacks. rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
When returning the rear seat back to the upright position
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be sure the seat back is latched.
be seriously injured in an accident. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Folding Rear Seats
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
marked “prop” on the underside of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of the
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
hood to ensure that both latches engage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! Dimmer Control

With the parking lights or headlights
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when on, rotating the dimmer control for the
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. interior lights on the Multi-Function
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches Control Lever upward will increase
are fully latched before driving. the brightness of the instrument panel
lights.
LIGHTS Dome Light Position

Interior Lights Rotate the dimmer control completely
The map/courtesy lights come on when a door is opened upward to the second detent to turn
and the panel lamp dimmer switch (located on the turn on the interior lights. The interior
signal control stalk) is in any detent except fully counter- lights will remain on when the dim-
clockwise (dome lamp ON position) or fully clockwise mer control is in this position.
(dome lamp OFF position). Rotating the panel dimmer
switch fully counter-clockwise will turn on the lights.
Turn the panel dimmer switch fully clockwise to prevent Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
the lights from coming on when a door is opened. Rotate the dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom full-circle position. The
NOTE: The interior lights have a “fade to off” feature. interior lights will remain off when the
When the lights are turned off, they gradually “fade” off. doors are open.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Daytime Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the dimmer control to the first
detent (full-circle). This feature bright-
ens the odometer and radio display
when the parking lights or headlights
are on during daylight conditions. 3
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped

These lights are mounted between the sun visors. Each
light has a push-on push-off switch.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is Front Map/Reading Light Switches
pressed a second time, so be sure that they have been
turned off before leaving the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Multi-Function Control Lever
Multi-Function Lever
Multi-Function Lever To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
The Multi-Function lever controls the operation of the turn the center portion of the lever up or down. Turning
headlights, turn signals, headlight beam select switch, the dimmer control to the full up position also turns on
instrument panel light dimming, courtesy lights, passing the courtesy lights. Turning the dimmer control to the full
lights, dome light and fog lights. down position prevents the courtesy lights from coming
on when a door is opened.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function lever to the first
detent for parking light operation. Turn to the second
detent for headlight operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Headlights—If Equipped Lights-on Reminder

This system automatically turns your headlights on at a If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
preset level of outdoor lighting. Turn the end of the is turned off, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
control lever to the third detent to turn the system on. is opened.
When the system is on, the headlight delay feature is also
Fog Lights — If Equipped
on. This means that your headlights will stay on for about
The fog light switch is in the multi-function lever.
3
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch off. To turn
To activate the fog lights, turn on the low beam
the Automatic system off, turn the control lever clock-
headlights and pull out the end of the control
wise, to the off position.
lever. A light in the instrument cluster shows when the
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- fog lights are on.
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
NOTE: The switch will turn on the fog lights only if the
NOTE: The Automatic Headlight System will turn on low beam headlights are on. Turning on the high beam
the headlights if it detects that the windshield wipers headlights turns off the fog lights.
have been in operation for more than 10 seconds.
Turn Signals
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) Move the turn signal lever up or down and the arrows in
The headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of
the ignition switch is turned on. The lights remain on the front and rear turn signal lights. You can signal a lane
until the ignition switch is turned OFF or the parking change by moving the lever partially up or down.
brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for
normal night time driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlight Beam Select Switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Pull the turn signal lever towards you to switch the The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the turn signal lever a right side control lever. Turn the end of the control lever
second time to switch the headlights to LOW beam. to select the desired wiper speed.
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the turn signal lever toward the steering
wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for about 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlighted area.
To activate the delay, turn off the ignition while the
headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights. The
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
delay interval begins when the ignition is turned off.
NOTE: Always remove any build-up of snow that
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to
will turn off in the normal manner. the OFF position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold Mist
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the Use this feature when weather conditions make occa-
delay range, the wiper will operate for several cycles sional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermit- release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.
tent interval previously selected.
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
3
will operate for several cycles, then turn OFF. make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Turn the lever to the delay
WARNING! position, then select the delay interval. The delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield between cycles, to a cycle every 1/2 second.
could lead to an accident. You might not see other NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of If the vehicle is moving less than 16 km/h (10 mph),
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the delay times will be doubled.
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING!

To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
desired. Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
in place. umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Tilt Steering Column Control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TRACTION CONTROL— IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The Traction Control System is enabled each
To turn the Traction Control System Off, press time the ignition switch is turned On. This will occur
the switch located on the top of the steering even if you used the switch to turn the system off before
column, to the right of the hazard switch, until powering down or turning the ignition to Lock.
the Traction Control indicator in the instrument
cluster lights up. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL— IF EQUIPPED 3
When engaged, this device will control the throttle op-
eration to maintain a constant vehicle speed between 30
mph (48 km/h) and 85 mph (137 km/h). The controls are
on the steering wheel.
Traction Control Switch

To turn the Traction Control System On, press the switch
until the Traction Control indicator in the instrument
cluster turns off.
Speed Control Switches
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Activate: To Deactivate:
Press the ON/OFF switch to turn the speed control A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
system ON. To turn the system OFF, press the ON/OFF button, or normal brake or clutch pressure will deactivate
switch again. The system should be turned OFF when not speed control without erasing the memory. Pushing the
in use. The CRUISE Indicator in the instrument cluster ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition turns the
will light up when the Speed Control is ON. speed control system off and erases the memory.
NOTE: You must press the ON button to activate the To Resume Speed:
system each time the engine is started. To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME/ACCEL button. Resume can be used at any
WARNING! speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting:
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system ON When the speed control is Engaged (actively controlling
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally to a SET speed), speed can be increased by pressing and
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. holding the RESUME/ACCEL button. When the button
You could lose control and have an accident. Always is released, a new set speed will be established.
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
Tapping the RESUME/ACCEL button once will result in
a 2 mph (3 km/h) increase in the SET speed. Each time
To Set At A Desired Speed:
the button is tapped, the SET speed increases. For ex-
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed and the
ample tapping the button three times will increase speed
system is ON, press and release the SET button. Release
by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. The speed control is now Engaged.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To decrease speed while speed control is Engaged, press When Climbing A Hill
and hold the COAST button. Releasing the button when If vehicle speed drops 3 mph (5 km/h) below the Speed
the desired speed is reached, will establish a new SET Control set speed, the transaxle will downshift to third
speed. gear. Under severe conditions the transaxle may down-
shift again to second gear. The transaxle will upshift to
Tapping the COAST button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in the SET speed. Each time the
fourth gear after the vehicle has reached the top of the 3
hill.
button is tapped, the SET speed decreases. For example,
tapping the button three times will decrease speed by 3 When Descending A Hill
mph (5 km/h). If vehicle speed rises 3 mph (5 km/h) over the Speed
Control set speed, the transaxle will downshift to third
To Accelerate For Passing:
gear. This provides engine braking to keep vehicle speed
NOTE: If the set speed is exceeded by 20 mph (32 under control. The transaxle will not downshift below
km/h) or more during the acceleration, the set speed will third gear to control vehicle overspeed. The transaxle will
have to manually re-engaged. upshift to fourth gear after the vehicle has reached the
bottom of the hill.
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the SET speed. NOTE: On very steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain
may occur. It may be preferable to drive without Speed
Using Speed Control On Hills
Control.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with
Interactive Speed Control. This feature operates when
travelling up or down hills with the Speed Control
engaged and the driver’s foot off of the accelerator.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rolling Hills GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

The transaxle may downshift into third gear and remain The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
there as the vehicle travels over rolling hills. The trans- three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
axle will upshift into fourth gear when the road flattens ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
out. gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
The transaxle will resume its normal shift schedule if you
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
depress the accelerator pedal during any of the above
are needed.
conditions.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Homelink Buttons
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and ous injury or death. 3
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage WARNING!
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 Your motorized door or gate will open and close
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
information or assistance. not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
Programming The Universal Transceiver cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held damage to objects.
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an 2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
down. Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
1. Turn off the engine. NOTE: Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons 5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
indicator light in view. seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
NOTE: If you do not successfully program the
Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand
held transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or
call toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515,
or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
“Rolling Code” Programming
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to pro-
Programming Universal Transceiver
gram the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter other device does not operate, and your device was
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed. other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature, difficulty in locating the training button, check your
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
copying of your code. the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code” 2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
system: opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
3
• Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
of “Rolling Codes”. start step 3.
• Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer- 3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
sal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds, and release the button a second time to complete the
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature. training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
training.
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing the Programming Your garage door opener should now recognize your
portion of this text: Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
now be programmed if this has not previously been
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Reprogramming A Single Button

Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
held transmitter button every two seconds during pro-
completed.
gramming
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
button while you press and release the hand held trans-
three inches away from the button to be trained.
mitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and 3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
the garage door or gate motor.
Security
Operation If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
flash.
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
be used at any time. This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- 3
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

Power Sunroof Controls
The sunroof controls are mounted between the sun visors
on the overhead console.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! Opening Sunroof - Manual

Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
tended children, can become entrapped by the tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof sunroof.
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious Opening Sunroof - Express
injury or death. Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
• In an accident, there is greater risk of being will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
passengers are properly secured too.
Closing Sunroof - Manual
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun- To Close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
any object to project through the sunroof opening. and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-
Injury may result. roof travel at any point.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sunshade Operation Sunroof Maintenance

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Sunroof Fully Closed
open. Press and hold the switch forward until the sunroof stops
completely to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.
3
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the The power outlet is located in the lower center of your
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the instrument panel. If your vehicle is equipped with heated
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain seats, a second power outlet is located inside the center
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- console. All accessories connected to any outlet should be
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4
䡵 Instrument Cluster Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 ▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
䡵 Instrument Cluster Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 ▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
䡵 Compass, Temperature, And Trip Computer ▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
䡵 Sales Code RAZ—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Cassette Tape Player, CD Player And CD
Changer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Compass Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 101
䡵 Cigar Lighter/Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ To Set The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
84 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

▫ Radio Data System (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ PTY (Program Type) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 ▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ Operating Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ AM/FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory . . . . . . 104 ▫ FF/Tune/RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ To Change From Clock To Radio Mode . . . . . . 104 ▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 104 ▫ Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 ▫ Tape CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 ▫ CD Changer Control Capability —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
䡵 Sales Code RBB—AM/FM Stereo Radio With 䡵 6 Disc CD Changer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 120
Cassette Tape Player And CD Changer
▫ Loading The CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ FF/Tune/RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Scan Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 4
▫ Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Cassette Player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Program Button 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ CD Changer Control Capability —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 121
䡵 Sales Code RBK—AM/ FM Stereo Radio ▫ Program Button 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
With CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . 114
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Removing Discs From The CD Changer . . . . . 122
▫ CD Changer Control Capability —
▫ CD Changer Operation With The Changer
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
䡵 Sales Code RB1—AM/FM Stereo Radio With
DVD/GPS Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — 䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 126
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
▫ CD Player — Single Disc In Radio . . . . . . . . . 124 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ CD Player — 6 Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Manual Air Conditioning/Heater Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 124
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STANDARD
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION • The system has been deactivated to prevent damage
to the brake system due to overheated brake tem-
1. Fuel Gauge
peratures.
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
the fuel tank. cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction
Control indicator. This is to prevent overheating of the
2. Traction Control — If Equipped
brake system and is a normal condition. The system will
This display indicator illuminates momentarily
remain disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn
turned ON. The indicator will blink during an
off the Traction Control indicator.
active traction event, but will remain solid
when the system is deactivated or if a system malfunc- 3. Cruise Light — If Equipped
tion occurs. This light shows that the Speed Control System is ON.
This light will also illuminate for a 5–second bulb check
The Traction Control indicator will turn ON if:
when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON
• The Traction Control system is in use. position.
• The Traction Control switch has been used to turn 4. Airbag Light
the system OFF. The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
• There is an Anti-Lock Brake system malfunction or
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb does not
Traction Control system malfunction.
come on during starting, have the bulb replaced. If the
light stays on, or comes on while driving, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Tachometer comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s

The red area of the scale shows the maximum permissible electrical devices, such as the Fog Lights or Rear
engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear Defroster. If the Charging System Light remains on, it
range. Before reaching the red area (over 6,500 rpm), ease means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with
up on the accelerator to prevent engine over speed. the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI-
ATELY. See your local authorized dealer.
6. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn 10. Malfunction Indicator Light 4
signal, when using the turn signal lever. This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD that monitors engine and
7. High Beam Indicator
automatic transmission control systems. The
This light shows that the headlights are on high
light will illuminate as long as the key is in the ON
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the
position, prior to engine start up. Approximately 15
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or
seconds later the MIL may blink for 10 seconds then
low beam.
resume to full illumination. (See “EMISSIONS IN-
8. Speedometer SPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS” in
Shows the vehicle speed in miles-per-hour and the “MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE” section of
kilometers-per-hour. your Owner Manual for more details). If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON,
9. Charging System Light
have the condition checked promptly.
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. The light should come on Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap or
briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain poor fuel quality may illuminate the light after engine
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
through several of your typical driving cycles. In most There are steps that you can take to slow down an
situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
require towing. on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert to serious
heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to
conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or
maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and the Fan
severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be
control to High. This allows the heater core to act as a
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
11. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped from the cooling system.
This light shows when the fog lights are ON.
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine cool-
12. Temperature Gauge ant condition.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal 14. Transmission Range Indicator
range (approximately mid point on the scale) This indicator illuminates to show the automatic trans-
shows that the cooling system is operating properly. mission gear selection.
The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal An optional AutoStick Gear Indicator displays the current
temperature when driving in hot weather, up moun- transaxle gear when in AutoStick mode.
tain grades, in heavy stop and go traffic, or when
towing a trailer. 15. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
If the pointer rises to the “H” mark, stop the vehicle and been driven.
turn off the engine until the problem is corrected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of 16. Anti-Lock Warning Light — If Equipped
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There- described elsewhere in this manual. This light
fore, if the odometer reading is changed, during repair or will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading RUN position and may stay on for several seconds. If
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can the light does not come on, have the system checked
be determined. by an authorized dealer. The warning light should be
checked frequently to assure that it is operating prop- 4
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
erly.
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press and release
the Trip Odometer button. Press and release the Trip If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
button a second time to return to the odometer. While in it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
trip mode, press and hold the button for at least 1⁄2 second is not functioning and that service is required, however,
to reset the trip odometer. the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
Door, Deck or Trunk Ajar Warnings
on.
If you move the vehicle and a door is not completely
17. Oil Pressure Light
closed, the word DOOR will replace the odometer dis-
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will
play and a chime will sound once. The odometer display
come on and remain on briefly when the igni-
will reappear when the door is closed. If the trunk is not
tion is turned on as a bulb check. If the bulb does not
completely closed, the word DECK will replace the
come on during starting, have the bulb repaired
odometer display. The odometer display will reappear
promptly.
when the trunk is closed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop WARNING!

the vehicle and shut off the engine. Do not operate the
vehicle until the cause is corrected. Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
You could have an accident. Have the vehicle
Section 7.
checked immediately.
18. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors both the brake fluid level
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
and the parking brake. If the light comes on,
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
it indicates either that the parking brake is
RUN position. (Refer to “A Word About Your Keys,
on or there is a low fluid level in the brake
Ignition Key Removal” in this manual for an illustration
master cylinder. On vehicles equipped with Anti-lock
of the ignition positions.) The light should come on. If the
brakes (ABS), the brake light may also indicate re-
light does not come on, have the system checked by an
duced braking performance.
authorized dealer.
If the parking brake is off and the light remains on, have
The light will also come on when the parking brake is
the brake system inspected as soon as possible.
applied with the ignition in the RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In an ABS equipped vehicle, the Brake System Warning 21. Low Fuel Light
light will come on if the ABS light is not functioning or if When the fuel level drops to about 2 1⁄2 gallons
the ABS system is not communicating. (9 1⁄2 liters), the fuel symbol will light and remain
lit until fuel is added.
19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this COMPASS, TEMPERATURE, AND TRIP
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb COMPUTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat 4
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or
remain on continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver
Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occu-
pant Restraints section for more information.
20. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
The light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for
15 seconds. This shows that the system is arming. If the
light comes on but does not flash, the system is still
armed, but there is a problem in the trunk circuit. After 15
seconds the light will continue to flash slowly. This Trip Computer Display
shows that the system is fully armed. This feature allows you to choose between a compass /
temperature display and one of five trip conditions being
monitored.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Control Buttons US / M Button

Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
Step Button
measurement units.
Use this button to choose or cycle through the five trip
conditions. Trip Conditions
Reset Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
The following trip conditions can be reset: This display shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset.
• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)
Estimated Range (DTE)
• ODO
This display shows the estimated distance that can be
• ET traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This esti-
mated distance is based on the most recent trip informa-
To reset only the trip condition currently displayed, press
tion: (Average Fuel Economy) x (Fuel Remaining)
and release the STEP and US/M buttons simultaneously
until a chime sounds. To reset all trip conditions, hold This display cannot be reset.
down the STEP and US/M buttons simultaneously
Present Fuel Economy (ECO)
(about 2 seconds) until a second chime sounds and then
This display shows fuel economy for the last few sec-
release the buttons.
onds.
NOTE: The screen must display one of the trip condi-
This display cannot be reset.
tions above in order to reset either (or all) of these
conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Trip Odometer (ODO) Compass Calibration

This display shows the distance traveled since the last The Automatic Compass Calibration feature eliminates
reset. the need for the operator intervention under normal
conditions. If the CAL indicator is lit, the compass needs
Elapsed Time (ET)
to be calibrated. A good calibration requires a level
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
surface and an environment free of large metal objects
since the last reset.
such as large buildings, bridges, underground cables,
Compass Temperature Display railroad tracks, etc. 4
This display provides the outside temperature and one of
Automatic Compass Calibration
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the
The self-calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the
vehicle is facing.
need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions.
During a short initial period, the compass may appear
WARNING! erratic and the CAL symbol will appear on the display.
After the vehicle has completed at least one complete
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
circle in an area free from large metal objects, calibration
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished.
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per- After initial calibration, the compass will continue to
sonal injury or property damage. automatically update this calibration whenever the ve-
hicle is in motion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Manual Compass Calibration Setting the Compass Variance

Compass calibration can also be requested. To manually Refer to the variance map for the correct compass vari-
calibrate the compass, use the STEP button to step to the ance zone. To check the variance zone, the ignition must
compass/ temperature display and then hold down both be on and the compass / temperature displayed. Hold
the STEP and US/M buttons simultaneously until the down both the US / M and STEP buttons simultaneously
CAL symbol is displayed. Release the buttons once the until the VAR symbol is lit and then immediately release
CAL symbol appears. Manual compass calibration has both buttons. The current variance zone will now be
been initiated at this point. Drive the vehicle in circles in displayed. To change the zone, press the STEP button
an area free from large metal objects until the CAL until the correct zone is displayed. Wait for about 5
symbol is extinguished. seconds. The trip computer will store this variance in
memory and the compass will resume normal operation.
When the CAL indicator goes off, the compass is cali-
brated and should display correct headings. Verify
proper calibration by checking North (N), South (S), East
(E), and West (W). If the compass does not appear
accurate, repeat the calibration procedure in another area.
Compass Variance
Variance is the difference between magnetic North and
geographic North. For proper compass function, the
correct variance zone must be set.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Outside Temperature
If the outside temperature is more than 131°F (55°C), the
display will show 131°F. When the outside temperature is
less than ⫺40°F (⫺40°C), the display will show ⫺40°F/C.
CIGAR LIGHTER/ASHTRAY
For a nominal charge your dealer can provide a “smok-
er’s” package. This package consists of a cigar lighter and 4
an ashtray that utilizes one of the cup holders.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK

The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout indicates the time in hours
and minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position. Whenever the radio is turned on, it first
comes up on either tape, cd or radio, whichever was
previously on, and will revert back to Time/Clock after a
few seconds. If Time/Clock was not previously selected,
the display will revert back to whichever was previously
on after a few seconds, whether it was tape, cd or radio.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, pressing
the Time button will cause the radio to display time for
several seconds, then turn off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Set The Clock: Two Types of Signals

There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
1. Use a ballpoint pen or similar object to press the hour
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
(H) or minute (M) buttons on the radio, The time setting
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
will increase each time you press the button.
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
2. Press any other button to exit from the clock setting frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
mode. Or, it will exit the mode automatically if left alone
Electrical Disturbances
for 5 or 6 seconds.
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
Radio Broadcast Signals interfere very little with the frequency variations that
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under carry the FM signal.
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op- AM Reception
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
you understand and save you concern about these “ap- and neon signs.
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or FM Reception
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig- Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
nals. tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SALES CODE RAZ—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO Seek Button (Radio Mode)

WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Holding
the button will by pass stations until you release the
button.
Tuning 4
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
RAZ Radio
Operating Instructions — Radio Radio Data System (RDS)
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the The Radio Data System allows radio broadcasting sta-
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to tions to send data signals on a subcarrier frequency
operate the radio. which is added to the stereo signal. RDS was developed
to give FM receivers user-friendly features, such as
Power Switch, Volume Control Program Service name (PS) and Program Type (PTY).
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the Program Service name is typically used by the broad-
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. The caster to display the station’s name or call letters, for
volume will be displayed and continuously updated example ⬙WNIC⬙. Typically these are 8 characters in
while the button is pressed. length and are displayed by the radio for those stations
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
which are broadcasting this information. PTY (Program Program Type Radio Display
Type) is used to characterize the station’s program ma- News News
terial, for example ⬙Rock Music⬙.
Nostalgia Nostalga
PTY (Program Type) Button Oldies Oldies
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for Personality Persnlty
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time Public Public
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
Rhythm and Blues R&B
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad- Religious Music Rel Musc
cast PTY information. Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
Soft Soft
types:
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Program Type Radio Display
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Sports Sports
Classical Classicl
Talk Talk
Classic Rock Cls Rock
Top 40 Top 40
College College
Weather Weather
Country Country
Information Inform By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Jazz Jazz
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
Foreign Language Language function only operates when in the FM mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY Fade
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If The Fade control provides for balance between the front
no station is found with the selected PTY program type, and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
the radio will return to the last preset station. Adjust the balance and push the button back in. The fade
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
button is turned.
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station. Tone Control 4
Slide the Bass and/or Treble controls up or down to
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
adjust the sound for the desired tone. The treble, and bass
at all RDS stations. Each RDS station will be played for a
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the
slide is moved.
last station. The PTY icon will then turn off.
AM/FM Selection
Balance
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
balance and push the button back in. The balance will be
station is received.
displayed and continuously updated while the button is
turned. Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5
seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the
next.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Pressing the AM/FM button continues the search in the To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
alternate frequency band. Press the Time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
To Set The Radio Push-button Memory
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
pull the cassette into the play position.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
and release that button. If a station is not selected within the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
memory. demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
You may add a second station to each push-button by Seek Button
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in selection.
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
button twice.
move 2 selections, etc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fast Forward (FF) Changing Tape Direction

Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance being played), press the PTY button. The lighted arrow in
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is the display window will show the new direction.
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
Metal Tape Selection
opposite direction.
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
Rewind (RW) player will automatically select the correct equalization 4
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
Pinch Roller Release
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
Tape Eject the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and eject from the radio. and the tape will resume play.
Scan Button Noise Reduction
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection. The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature. tape player is on, but may be switched off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press the Inserting The Compact Disc
Dolby button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR The CD player contained within the radio is not a
light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is multi-disc changer, and will only accept one CD. Gently
off. The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing
time a tape is inserted. up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo- radio to CD mode and begin to play. The display will
ratories Licensing Corporation. show the track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.
Operating Instructions — CD Player
NOTE:
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
• You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. The ignition
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a
will operate.
disc with the radio OFF.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
CAUTION! OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs Player and the display will show the time of day. If
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will
CD player mechanism. show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seek Button Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on selected track.
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
EJT CD (Eject) Button
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play. 4
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the MODE
radio mode. Press the MODE button to select between the tape player,
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be CD player, or satellite radio (if equipped).
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF. button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will
FF/TUNE/RW be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to current channel name and number will be displayed for
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse) five seconds. The current program type and channel
button works in a similar manner. number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the se-
lected disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tape CD Button Disc Down/Program Button 5

Press this button to select between CD player and Tape Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
player. previous disc.
Time Button Seek Button
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
playing time to time of day. same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Scan Button Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track. Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time. hold the RW button for fast reverse.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD fast reverse are activated.
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-
Random Play (RND)
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
this CD changer.
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
Mode Button pace.
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
CD information appears on the display.
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CD Diagnostic Indicators SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIO

When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or CHANGER CAPABILITY
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot. 4
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
RBB Radio
• Disc inserted upside down Radio Operation
• Damaged disc Power/Volume Control
• Water condensation on optics Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through Tune

the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
to operate the radio. decrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
Electronic Volume Control
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
ously updated while the button is pushed.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to To Set The Push-Button Memory
the left decreases it. When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
set at the same volume level as last played.
Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down, and press and release that button. If a button is not
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
is ON. the station will continue to play but will not be locked
into push-button memory.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next You may add a second station to each push-button by
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
make another selection. Holding the button will bypass both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations without stopping until you release it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by setting tone, balance, and fade.
pressing the push-button twice.
AM/FM Selection
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
button number will be displayed. operating mode will be displayed next to the station
Audio
station is received in the FM mode. 4
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BAL-
ANCE, and FADE. Mode Button
Press the MODE button to select between the cassette
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
tape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (if
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is
Bass tones.
selected “SAT” will appear in your radio display.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
Satellite or radio mode.
decrease the Treble tones.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the the search, press SCAN a second time.
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cassette Player Features Selective Music Search

With ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you can Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
eject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button. number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette or
move 2 selections, etc.
activating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),
but only when the ignition and radio are on. Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Pressing the TUNE button up or down momentarily
Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will begin
activates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the direc-
playing on the side of the cassette that is facing up in the
tional arrows appear on the display.
player.
To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE button
Music Search
again.
Pressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will start
the Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for the Time Button
next selection on the tape and down to return to the Press the time button to toggle between station frequency
beginning of the current selection, or return to the and time of day.
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within
SCAN Button (Cassette Mode)
the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape will
The SEEK symbol appears on the display when Music change the side of the tape being played.
Search is in operation. Music Search shuts off automati-
NR (Noise Reduction)
cally when a selection has been located.
Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape is
playing deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on the Seek Button

display. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turn Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
ON. same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo- hold the RW button for fast reverse.
ratories Licensing Corporation. 4
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped fast reverse are activated.
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
Random Play (RND)
this CD changer.
pace.
Mode Button
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Push-Button
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If • Water condensation on optics

Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
Manual. WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
CONTROLS
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is RBK Radio
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons: Radio Operation
• Excessive vibration Power/Volume Control
• Disc inserted upside down Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
• Damaged disc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
to operate the radio. memory.
Seek You may add a second station to each push-button by
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in 4
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
make another selection. Holding the button in will by- stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
pass stations without stopping until you release it. stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset
Tune
button is used a corresponding button number will be
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
displayed.
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the Audio
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu- The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BAL-
ously updated while the button is pressed. ANCE, and FADE.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button. Bass tones.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be General Information
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
decrease the Treble tones. RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the 1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be including interference that may cause undesired opera-
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the tion.
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit proved by the party responsible for compliance could
setting tone, balance, and fade. void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Selection CD Player Operation
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
station is received.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Inserting The Compact Disc EJT — Eject

Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
CAUTION! to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
CD player mechanism.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF 4
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF. (except on convertibles).
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio FF/TUNE/RW
OFF, the display will show the time of day. Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD button works in a similar manner.
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
one. to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on
the selected disc in random order to provide an interest-
Seek
ing change of pace.
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
beginning of the current selection, or return to the selected track.
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop Disc Up/Program Button 1
Random Play. Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the Disc Down/Program Button 5
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if previous disc.
equipped) is selected “SAT” will appear in your radio
Seek Button
display.
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Satellite mode.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Time Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
Press the TIME button to change the display from hold the RW button for fast reverse.
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped fast reverse are activated.
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
Random Play (RND)
this CD changer.
pace.
Mode Button
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If • Water condensation on optics

Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s SALES CODE RB1—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
Manual. WITH DVD/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or 4
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
MODE is selected.
RB1 Radio
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons: tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
• Excessive vibration variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navi-
gation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
• Disc inserted upside down tions.
• Damaged disc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with the CD Loading the CD Changer
Changer option, you will not be able to use the Naviga- When inserting the first CD into the changer if the radio
tion system and the CD Player simultaneously. Always is on, wait until the single slot is illuminated on both
remove the Navigation DVD before inserting another sides and simply insert the first disc.
disc.
To insert additional CDs into the changer, the instructions
6 DISC CD CHANGER — IF EQUIPPED follow:
The CD changer is located below the radio in the 1. Select and press any numbered button without an
instrument panel. The changer plays only 4 3⁄4 inch (12 illuminated light above it.
cm) discs. The changer holds up to 6 discs. Each disc is
loaded and ejected through a single slot in front of the 2. Insert the CD while the light above the chosen button
changer. Each disc has a numbered button with an amber is flashing and the two lights on either side of the slot are
light above it which, when illuminated, indicates that a illuminated.
disc is loaded in that particular chamber. 3. Upon insertion, the CD will begin to play, and both the
button light and the lights in the corner of the loading
slot will illuminate.
4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CDs.
The CD player will stop while additional CDs are loaded.
6 Disc CD Changer
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Playing Discs Program Button 1

The radio will show the CD number, the CD track Press this button to play the next available disc.
number, and the Track Time Elapsed while the radio is in
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
the CD mode. If more than one CD is loaded in the
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
changer, the changer will automatically play the next disc
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
after playing the last track of the current disc.
current compact disc in random order to provide an
Seek Button interesting change of pace. The CD changer stays in the 4
Press the top of this button on the radio once to play the random play mode when changing to the next disc.
next track. Press the bottom of the button once to return
NOTE: The changer will not random play between
to the beginning of the current track. Press the bottom of
discs.
the button twice to play the previous track.
Press the top of the Seek button once to move to the next
FF/TUNE/RW
randomly selected track. Press the bottom of the Seek
Press the FF (fast forward) button and the CD player will
button to go back to the beginning of the track.
fast forward through the tracks until the button is re-
leased. Press the RW (rewind) button and the CD player Press button 4 a second time to stop random play.
will reverse through the tracks until the button is re-
Program Button 5
leased.
Press this button to play the previous disc.
Mode Button
Press this button to toggle between radio and cd modes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Time Button Removing Discs from the CD Changer

Press this button to switch between time of day and CD If there is a single CD in the changer, press the EJT button
track time. and the CD will eject. If the CD is not removed within 15
seconds, it will automatically reload into the CD changer.
Changing Modes
To eject additional CDs from the changer, first select the
While in the radio mode, if a cassette is loaded, press the
numbered button where the CD is located and then press
Mode button to switch to the tape mode. If a CD is
the EJT button.
loaded, press the Mode button to select the CD mode. If
neither a tape nor CD is loaded, the radio will ignore the CD Changer Operation with the Changer Off
command. The CD changer is able to load and eject discs with the
ignition power off. However, while the ignition is off, one
• Inserting either a tape or CD automatically starts that
of the six numbered buttons must be pressed first.
mode of play.
• Pressing the AM/FM button while in the tape or CD REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
mode will select the radio mode. EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
• If in the CD mode and the last CD is ejected, the radio surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
will tune to the last station selected. access the switches.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a

push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next 4
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
Remote Sound System Controls will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset push-button.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and Tape Player
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/
CD, Etc.). If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
function in this mode. second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
CD Player — Single Disc in Radio The button in the center of the left hand switch will cause
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next the CD changer to play the next available disc.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
after the current track begins to play. take the following precautions:
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the 1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc. sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode. 2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
CD Player — 6 Disc CD Changer
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next 3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the 4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second tightly secured to the cassette.
after the current track begins to play.
5. A loose tape should not be inserted into the radio.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of following precautions:
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
1. Handle the disc by its edge or center; avoid touching
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
the surface.
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should wiping from center to edge. 4
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
WET cleaning cassette.
ing the disc.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
or antistatic sprays.
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- CLIMATE CONTROLS

lar disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
Equipped
considering disc player service. You may have a problem
with CD-R (recordable) and CD-RW (recordable and
writable) disks.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES

Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened Automatic Temperature Controls
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio various weather conditions with a simple two step op-
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo- eration. Press the AUTO button and select your comfort
sitioning of the cellular antenna, it is recommended that setting. The system will automatically control comfort by
the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular varying temperature, fan speed, and Mode.
phone operation.
You also may choose to customize your comfort by
selecting the fan speed and Mode. This will place the
system into manual operation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior ATC Sensors NOTE: The Mode can change when the system is in the
There are two interior sensors in the vehicle. The Sun Auto Mode. This will be indicated in changes in the
Sensor is mounted in the center of the instrument panel display window. This shows automatic changes in air
near the windshield glass. The In-Car Temperature Sen- direction.
sor is mounted behind the ATC control panel. These
Fan Control
sensors transmit data on sun strength and vehicle interior
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
temperatures to enhance system performance.
through the system in any mode you select. Turn the 4
control clockwise to increase fan speed.
CAUTION! In ambient temperatures below 21°C (70°F), fan opera-
Do not cover either sensor with any foreign material tion is delayed when the engine is first started. The fan
as improper operation of the system will result. will automatically start when the engine coolant is warm
enough to heat the air. This feature can be defeated by
turning the fan control.
Level Of Automatic Control
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum AUTO Control
comfort for the average person, however, this may vary. Press the top of the button to turn the ATC system On.
Press the lower portion of the button to turn the entire
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any system Off.
time without affecting automatic control operation.
The control also will show what Mode the system is in by
the figure shown in the display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Comfort Control The compressor can operate at any temperature above

Use this control to regulate the comfort inside the pas- 32°F (0°C).
senger compartment. Press the top of the switch to raise
With the compressor off and the temperature set at Lo, air
the temperature selection and the bottom of the switch to
entering the vehicle will be slightly warmer than the air
lower it. The comfort setting range is from Low, 60,
outside the vehicle.
61,....to 89,90, Hi, for automatic temperature control. You
can select a very hot or cold comfort setting by holding NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine
the comfort control until it reaches its highest or lowest has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in
levels. engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-
pressor is on. This is a normal occurrence since the
The system adjusts to bring the interior temperature to
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and
the desired comfort level. All comfort settings are auto-
improve fuel economy.
matic; even Hi and Low.
Recirculate Button
NOTE: You can change the display from U.S. to metric
Press this button to recirculate the air inside the
units by pressing the Mix and Panel mode buttons
vehicle. Outside air is prevented from entering the
simultaneously or by pressing the English/Metric button
vehicle. Recirculation is automatically controlled when
on the overhead console.
the system is in Auto Mode. Use this mode to temporarily
Air Conditioning Button block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust.
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel,
compressor. A snow flake symbol in the display
Floor, and Bi-Level modes. It will not operate in Mix, or
shows that the compressor is on. Compressor
Defrost modes.
operation is automatic when you press the Auto button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The Recirc button light will blink if you try to Mix
use it in the Mix or Defrost modes. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demist outlets. Use this setting in
Air Direction Buttons (Mode)
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat
These buttons allow you to select from five air distribu-
at the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
tion patterns. These buttons should be used only when
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
you can not achieve comfort or visibility in Auto opera-
The compressor is on in this mode.
tion. A symbol in the display window will show which 4
mode is operating. Bi-Level
Air is directed through both the panel and floor
Panel
outlets. This mode is not recommended when
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
heat is required in very cold temperatures.
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
air flow. This mode is not recommended when heat is NOTE: There is a varying difference in temperature
required. between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort.
The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature
Floor
provides improved comfort during sunny but cool con-
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
ditions.
lesser amount through the Defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode is recommended
when heat is desired.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Defrost
CAUTION!
Air is directed through the defrost outlets and
side window demist outlets. A small amount of To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not
air also is directed through the floor outlets. Use this use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window
mode with maximum fan and comfort level settings cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.
for best windshield and side window defrosting. The Labels can be peeled off by soaking with warm
defrost symbol will glow in amber to show that the water.
defroster is on.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor is on in this Window Fogging
mode. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind- In mild but rainy or humid weather, your windows may
shield. To improve fuel economy, leave in the defrost fog up on the inside. You can remove this fog by pressing
mode only when necessary. the Defrost button. The Mix mode can be used to
Rear Window Defroster maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heat-
Press the button once to turn on the Rear Window ing. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase
Defroster and a second time to turn it off. An blower speed. The compressor will remain on during
indicator light in the control shows that the defroster is these conditions.
on. NOTE: Do not use the recirculated air mode under
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 15 these conditions as window fogging may occur.
minutes of operation. Each later activation will allow 7
1/2 minutes of operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Hot Weather Automatic Recirculation Rear Seat Outlets

The system will automatically recirculate the air inside These outlets are located under the front seats and direct
the vehicle when the interior is very warm. This will warm air to the rear seat passengers. Air is directed
provide maximum cooling. The system will also occa- through these outlets when you select either the Floor,
sionally return to REC on hot, humid or very hot, dry Bi-Level, or Mix modes.
days to maintain occupant comfort.
Outside Air Intake
Side Window Demisters Make sure that the air intake directly in front of the 4
Side window demisters are located on the instrument windshield is free of obstructions. Leaves, snow, etc.,
panel. These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the could block air flow into the vehicle.
side windows in any mode except Panel or Panel Recir-
NOTE: If you cannot get comfortable in the AUTO
culation. The air is directed toward the area of the side
mode by adjusting the comfort set point up or down
windows through which you view the outside rearview
please refer to the Operating Tips chart (for ATC only) at
mirrors.
the end of this section for suggested control settings in
different weather conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operating Tips (ATC only)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If the system is in the AUTO mode and the fan The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
control is already rotated fully clockwise or fully coun- R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
terclockwise, the control may have to be rotated to the in the upper atmosphere.
middle and then to the desired fan setting for manual
The controls are as follows:
adjustment of fan speed.
Fan and Air Conditioning Control
Manual Air Conditioning/Heater Control — If
Use this control to regulate the
Equipped 4
amount of air forced through the sys-
The Air Conditioning System allows you to balance the
tem in any mode you select. The 0
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
Setting represents OFF and the 4 Set-
throughout the vehicle.
ting is the greatest amount of air flow.
Air Conditioning Operation

To turn on the Air Conditioning,
choose the direction of the air through
the outlets by selecting between the
Air Conditioning Recirculation, Panel-
Air Conditioning, or Bi-Level Air Con-
ditioning modes on the Mode Control.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls
Air Conditioning modes are indicated
by the snowflake symbol shown above in illustration.
Adjust the Temperature and Fan Controls.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed Mode Control

when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a The mode control allows you to
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and choose from several patterns of air
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy. distribution.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the air condition-
ing condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. The
air conditioning condenser is located in front of the
• Recirculation — Air Conditioning
radiator. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the
Recirculated interior air is cooled and sent
radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia
through the instrument panel vents. Upon
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing
initial start up of the vehicle in very hot or
air conditioning performance.
humid weather, open windows and put in
Temperature Control outside air modes to flush hot/humid air out. Then
Use this control to regulate the tem- turn on the Recirculation mode to cool the vehicle
perature of the air inside the passenger interior rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be
compartment. The blue area of the used to temporarily block out any outside odors,
scale indicates cooler temperatures smoke, or dust.
while the red area indicates warmer
NOTE: Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
temperatures.
make the inside air stuffy and under mild, humid condi-
tions cause windows to fog. Use of this mode for longer
than 15 minutes is not recommended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Panel — Air Conditioning • Floor

Outside air flows through the air condition- Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
ing system and then through the outlets lesser amount through the defrost and side
located in the instrument panel. window demist outlets.
• Bi-Level — Air Conditioning • Mix
Outside air flows through the air condition- Air is directed through the floor, defrost and
ing system and then through the outlets side window demist outlets. This setting 4
located in both the instrument panel and floor works best in cold or snowy conditions that
outlets. require extra heat at the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
• Panel
ture on the windshield.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to • Defrost
direct air flow. Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demist outlets. Use this mode
• Bi-Level
with maximum fan and temperature settings for
Air is directed through the instrument panel
best windshield and side window defrosting.
and floor outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
both Mix and Defrost modes even if the Air Conditioning
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
is not selected. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
windshield.
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Seat Outlets Side Window Demisters

These outlets are located under the front seats and direct A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
warm air to the rear seat passengers. Air is directed instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air
through these outlets when you select either the Floor, toward the side windows when the system is in either the
Bi-Level, or Mix modes. FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST modes. A small amount of air
is directed to the side window demisters in BI-LEVEL
Rear Window Defroster
mode as well. The air is directed at the area of the
The Rear Window Defroster button is located to
windows through which you view the outside mirrors.
the right of the Mode Control. Press this button
once to turn on the Rear Window Defrost and a second Windshield and Side Window Fogging
time to turn them off. A light above the button shows that Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly
the defroster is on. removed by using the defrost position on the mode
control.
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 15
minutes of operation. Each later activation will allow 10 Your side windows may fog on the inside in mild
minutes of operation. rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows,
select the Panel-Air Conditioning mode on the
Mode Control. Point the panel outlets toward the side
windows.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Do not use the recirculation mode as it will not Winter Operation
clear windows under these conditions. The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only the low blower speeds for the first 10 minutes of
Summer Operation
operation. During engine warm up in cold weather, use
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-
the Defrost mode to direct any cold air away from vehicle
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
occupants. Use of the Recirculate-Air Conditioning Mode
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
during winter months is not recommended due to the
protection against overheating. A 50 % concentration is 4
possibility of window fogging.
recommended.
NOTE: See Operating Tips chart (for Manual A/C
Control) at the end of this section for suggested control
settings in different weather conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operating Tips (Manual A/C Control Only)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
Air Intake
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Four Speed Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . 149 5
▫ Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20°F Or
-29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automati
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Battery And Engine Block Heaters —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Traction Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 155
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 159 䡵 AutoStick — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 160 ▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ Spark Knock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 168 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 ▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
䡵 Flexible Fuel – (2.7L Engines With Automatic ▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Transmission Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transaxle

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
CAUTION! Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera- Simply turn the key to the “START’” position and release
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
your vehicle unattended with the engine running. within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
WARNING! wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
5
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
Ignition Key Positions
WARNING! Extreme Cold Weather (below -20°F or -29°C)
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start externally powered electric engine block heater and
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing battery blanket heater package (available from your
serious personal injury. dealer) is recommended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If Engine Fails to Start If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
“NORMAL STARTING” or “EXTREME COLD held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” or “EX-
WEATHER” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the TREME COLD WEATHER” procedure should be re-
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there peated.
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
After Starting
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up. At cooler ambient temperatures, the idle
CAUTION! speed for the 2.7L engine may increase during extended
idles for improved heater performance.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to BATTERY AND ENGINE BLOCK HEATERS — If
15 seconds before trying again. EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
have enough power to continue running when the key is
grounded, three wire extension cord. The engine block
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
heater cord is found under the hood near the air cleaner
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
housing.
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord could those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
cause electrocution. you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle you should shift
the transmission into Park, remove the key from the
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are ignition, and apply the park brake. Once the key is
expected to last for several days. removed from the ignition the transmission shift
lever is locked in the Park position, securing the
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, 5
you should never leave children unattended inside a
Brake/Transmission Interlock vehicle. The following indicators should be used to
This interlock system prevents you from moving the gear ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift
selector out of the Park position unless the brake pedal is lever into the “Park” position:
pressed. The system is active when the ignition switch is • When shifting into Park, depress the button on
in the RUN position. the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the
way forward until it stops.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console
to ensure it is in the “P” position.
• When engaged in Park you will not be able to
move the shifter rearward without depressing the
shift lever button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! WARNING!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
precautions are not observed: “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
a complete stop. vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the someone or something. Only shift into gear when
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the the engine is idling normally and when your right
engine is at idle speed. foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
idle speed.
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button
is firmly on the brake pedal. is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the OFF or RUN positions.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system may trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrat- convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
ing; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be determine if the problem could recur.
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and preci-
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
sion shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic
Reset Mode
Transaxle
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause 5
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the NOTE: If the key is in the RUN position, you must
forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral press the brake pedal to shift out of the “P” Park position.
(N) will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the
“P” Park
vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without
Supplements parking by locking the transaxle. Engine
damaging the transaxle.
can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the while vehicle is in motion.
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
Apply parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P). range.
Turn the Key to LOCK then restart the engine.
Shift into D and resume driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! “D” Overdrive

This range should be used for most city and highway
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to and best fuel economy.
move the gearshift lever back and forth without
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
depressing the shift button after you have set it in P.
Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers), use the “3” range.
WARNING!
“3” Drive
Never use the Park position as a substitute for the This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transaxle
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully will operate normally in first and second while in this
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and range.
possible injury or damage.
A delayed shift from second to third will occur at speeds
of about 31 to 38 mph (50 to 60 km/h) and low levels of
“R” Reverse accelerator pedal travel. An early down-shift from third
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a to second will occur at a speed of about 34 to 30 mph (54
complete stop. to 48 km/h). This is done to provide second gear engine
braking at speeds less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle PARKING BRAKE
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor- When the parking brake is applied with the
mance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reduc- ignition on, the brake light in the instrument
ing excessive shifting and heat build up. cluster will come on.
Use the “3” range when descending steep grades to
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
prevent brake system distress.
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
“L” Low
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts 5
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts occur as early as possible.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage. Parking Brake
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal and WARNING!
pull up on the parking brake lever. Push the release
button and lower the lever fully. • Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
could be injured. Children should be warned not
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector.
the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it
Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could
difficult to move the selector out of Park. As an added
operate power windows, other controls, or move
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
the vehicle.
downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
You should always apply the parking brake before leav- failure and an accident.
ing the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
BRAKE SYSTEM If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as bility, the remaining system will still function with some
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications by increased pedal travel during application and greater
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
than that required with the power system operating. fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
WARNING! Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped 5
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and performance under most braking conditions. The system
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
braking capacity in an emergency. tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate
signals for the ABS computer. However, the system will
compensate when the compact spare is in use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
During stops where ABS is activated, a vibration of the WARNING!

brake pedal may be felt and associated system noises
may be heard. • Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
WARNING! can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the effec- brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
tiveness of Anti-lock brakes and may lead to an • The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
you need to slow down or stop. planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
POWER STEERING
The power assisted steering system of your vehicle
provides mechanical steering capability in the event
power assist is lost.
If for some reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions you will observe a substantial increase in
steering effort.
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

5
The Traction Control System will improve acceleration
and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire spin.
Traction Control Switch
The system reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at
the driving (front) wheels by engaging the brake on the A push-button located on the top of the steering column
wheel that is losing traction. When this occurs the turns the Traction Control System ON or OFF.
traction control indicator light located in the instrument The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:
cluster will flash. The system operates at speeds below 35
mph (56 km/h). • The traction control switch has been used to turn the
system off;
• There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;
• There is a Traction Control System malfunction;
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The system has been automatically deactivated to TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
Tire Markings
brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the traction
control light located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system
will automatically reactivate and turn off the traction
control light.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System Off before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free. NOTE:
• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire.
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire 5
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for
passenger cars is listed on either the face of the driver’s
door or the driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other
than passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are
listed on either the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in
the Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove com-
partment.
Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about
the,
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Loading Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
your vehicle’s placard.
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
this manual.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 5
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
calculated in step 4.
the weight referenced here.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
manual to determine how this reduces the available seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities Kg).
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! 1. Safety—
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never cause accidents.
overload them. • Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION • Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
Tire Pressure damage that results in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. 5
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the Tire Placard Location
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment. check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the

CAUTION!
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al- inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the outside temperature condition.
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
sure molded into the tire side wall. important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
temperature changes. dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
mph (120 km/h). original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity. 5
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle (80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al- tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
them with other types of tires. warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on vehicle
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. at the first opportunity.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
CAUTION! only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
result. Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use Tire Spinning
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
5
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
to help you in determining when your tires should be
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
replaced.
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacement Tires WARNING!

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance suspension dimensions and performance charac-
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa- dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
service description and load identification will be found suspension components. You could lose control
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han- death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you ratings approved for your vehicle.
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi- capacity, other than what was originally equipped
cations or capability. on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION!
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size mended.
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings. CAUTION!
Alignment And Balance Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
Poor suspension alignment may result in: used.
• Fast tire wear. 5

SNOW TIRES
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
wear. during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
• Vehicle pull to right or left. and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
for proper diagnosis. type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
km/h). sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
Tire Rotation Recommendations rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at diagram.
different loads and perform different steering, driving
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
Autostick Operation
The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive posi-
tion and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When Gear Selector
you place the shift lever in the Autostick position, it can
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
choose the Overdrive mode, the transaxle will operate
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
automatically; shifting between the four available gears.
display.
When you wish to engage autostick, simply move the
autostick lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The trans-
axle will remain in the current gear until an upshift or
downshift is chosen.
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out
of the Autostick mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Autostick General Information • If the system detects a problem it will disable the
Autostick mode and the transaxle will return to the
• The transaxle will automatically upshift from first to
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM. FUEL REQUIREMENTS
• Downshifts from third to second gear above 66 mph Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
(106 km/h) and from second to first gear above 37 sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
mph (60 km/h) will be ignored. economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
• You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting 87. The use of premium gasoline is not
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed recommended. The use of premium gaso-
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). line will provide no benefit over high quality regular
• The transaxle will automatically downshift to first gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
gear when coming to a stop. poorer performance.
• Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy Spark Knock

conditions. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
• While in the Autostick mode, Speed Control will only high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
function in third or fourth gear. Downshifting out of required.
third gear turns off speed control.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with mate-
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be- rials called oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and
fore considering service for the vehicle. ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the
country during the winter months to reduce carbon
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygen-
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
ates may be used in your vehicle.
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The CAUTION! 5
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available. DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
Reformulated Gasoline
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
ponents.
burning fuel referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
cially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
air quality. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso- does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MMT in Gasoline Materials Added to Fuel

MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num- contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
Fuel System Cautions
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump, CAUTION!
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT. Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at higher
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
levels than allowed in the United States.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
MMT is prohibited in both Federal and California refor- or damage the emission control system.
mulated gasolines. • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
octane enhancers are not recommended. Most of these monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
products contain high concentrations of methanol. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
the responsibility of the manufacturer. stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte- 5
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
WARNING! windows fully open.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. • Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
monoxide poisoning: haust gases from entering the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ADDING FUEL NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
tightened.
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the driver’s
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on if the
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be
gas cap is not properly secured. Make sure that the gas
sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
CAUTION! fuel tank is full.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube may have a restricting
system could result from using an improper fuel door about 50 mm (2 inches) down from the opening. If
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap fuel is poured from a portable container, the container
could let impurities into the fuel system. should have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open
the restricting door.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
off” the fuel tank after filling. Indicator Lamp to turn on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
tank filled. view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is safely as possible.
running.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
hicles used for trailer towing. 5
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling. Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the main-
tenance schedules manual. When your vehicle is used for
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating
VEHICLE LOADING
(GAWR) by the addition of:
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 • The tongue weight of the trailer.
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs. (52 kg) put in or on your vehicle.
Rated Vehicle Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . 865 lbs. ( 392 kg)
• Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Towing Requirements WARNING!

• The maximum trailer load is 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
• The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed brake lines can overload your brake system and
20 square feet (1.86 square meters). cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
• If using a manual transaxle vehicle for trailer towing, need them and could have an accident.
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive
clutch slippage. • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and • Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire– recommended for motoring safety.
Safety Information Section in this manual.
• The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be
• The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule
range must be selected. “B” in section 8 of this manual for transaxle fluid
change intervals.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor- NOTE: Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before
mance and extend tranaxle life by reducing excessive towing. Fluid discoloration, or a burnt odor, shows the
shifting and heat build up. need for a transmission fluid and filter change.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using FLEXIBLE FUEL – (2.7L Engines with Automatic
the Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range, Transmission Only)
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range
E-85 General Information
should be selected that allows for adequate performance.
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
For example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain the
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
desired speed.
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
NOTE: Extended driving at high RPM should be subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in the other sections of this manual for information on 5
vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle gasoline only powered vehicles.
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85) • you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 liters) when
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and refueling
15% unleaded gasoline.
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
WARNING!
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok- during warm up.
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov- NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the (32°C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never following start up even if the above recommendations are
use it near an open flame. followed.
Selection of Engine Oil
Fuel Requirements
For best performance and protection of your vehicle, use
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
only crankcase engine oils that meet the following re-
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
quirements:
these two.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identi-
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-
fication Symbol
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that:
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
This symbol means that the oil has Flexible Fuel (FFV) or Alternate Fuel (AFV). These
been certified by the American engine oils may be satisfactory if they meet the Manu-
Petroleum Institute (API). We facturer’s Standard.
only recommend API Certified en-
The 5W-30 engine oil installed at the factory meets the
gine oils that meet the require-
manufacturer’s requirements for Flexible Fuel engine oil.
ments of DaimlerChrysler’s Mate-
rial Standard MS-9214. Use Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in Flexible Fuel
or an equivalent oil meeting the engines.
specification MS-9214.
5
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- CAUTION!
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s If Flexible Fuel engine oil is not used when using
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi- E-85, engine wear may be increased significantly.
tives. This may void your warranty.
• Engine Oil Selection for Operating on E-85
• Engine Oil Selection for Operating on Gasoline
If you operate the vehicle on E-85 fuel, either full or
part-time, use only Mopar Flexible Fuel 5W-30 engine If you operate the vehicle on regular unleaded gasoline
oil (P/N 4318086) or an equivalent that meets the ONLY, use Mopar oil or an equivalent that meets certified
Manufacturer’s Standard MS-9214. Equivalent com- API (American Petroleum Institute) Quality.
mercial Flexible Fuel engine oils may be labeled as
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting
CAUTION!
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
range of 0°F to 32°F (-18°C to 0°C), you may experience compatible components can damage your vehicle
an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and may void the warranty.
and a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesita-
tions) until the engine is fully warmed up.
Maintenance
Cruising Range If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Sched-
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline CAUTION!
operation.
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
Replacement Parts vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are may affect driveability.
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 䡵 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 6
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low . . . 192
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
186 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
Hazard Flasher Switch neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
The flasher switch is on top of the steering column, NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
just behind the steering wheel. Depress the switch an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
and both cluster indicators and all front and rear direc- is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
tional signals will flash. Depress the switch again to turn the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
Hazard Warning Flashers off. removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
from the engine cooling system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 187
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage WARNING!
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle in Park • Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
and call for service. or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
6
WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling operating the jack or changing the wheel.
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your • The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
System Pressure Cap paragraph. slippery areas.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Preparations for Jacking

Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, and set the parking brake. Place the gear
selector in PARK.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher, park vehicle on
firm, level surface.
• Put gear shift in park (automatic transmission) or
reverse (manual transmission).
• Set parking brake and turn off engine.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Changing a Tire
The spare wheel, scissors jack, and lug wrench are
stowed under the spare tire cover in the rear cargo area.
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Block wheel diagonally op-

posite flat tire.
2. Remove the spare tire, scissors jack and lug wrench

from stowage.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use lug wrench to carefully
pry off wheel cover (if equipped with steel wheels) or
center cap (if equipped with aluminum wheels). Loosen, 6
but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them Center Cap Removal
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal
edges and retention teeth.
4. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack

saddle with the lift area of the sill flange. Use the lift area
closest to the flat tire
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove flat tire and
install spare tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Jack Engagement Locations
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
to remove the tire. the places provided.
6. Remove lug nuts and tire. 12. Wheel cover installation (if required). Do not attempt
to install a wheel cover on a compact spare. Align valve
7. Mount spare tire.
notch in wheel cover with valve stem on wheel. Snap
8. Tighten all lug nuts on mounting studs. cover into place. 6
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack NOTE: When reinstalling the center cap it is necessary
handle counterclockwise. to align the center cap notch with the first spoke, just
right of the valve stem.
10. Fully tighten the lug nuts. Torque wheel lug nuts to
100 ft. lbs. (135 N·m). 13. Adjust the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure is on the label located on the driver’s door.
11. Store the flat tire, jack and tools.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind

LOW the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
WARNING! in the engine compartment for jump starting.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
inadvertent electrical contact.
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once 2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
the engine has started, ignite and damage the that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis- letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to matic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to OFF for
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of both vehicles.
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
follow this procedure carefully.
loads.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the 4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan. terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end to
the positive jump start attachment of the discharged
battery.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! 5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal

of the booster battery and then to the jump start attach-
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this ment of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make
could establish a ground connection and person sure you have a good contact on the engine.
injury could result.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below 6
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting to jump start.
Jump Starting
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster WARNING!
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area
WARNING! immediately with large quantities of water.
Any procedure other than above could result in: A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
out the battery vent;
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery volts.
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle. WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
Acceleration
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
be observed:
(driving) wheels, particularly with high output engines.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
WARNING! slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger- 6
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
the front wheels. You could lose control of the visible.
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). 5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
NOTE: If so equipped, turn on the Traction Control
System to accelerate on slippery surfaces.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control, turn Flat bed towing is the preferred towing method. If a flat
the system off before attempting to “rock” the vehicle. bed towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing
vehicle may be used.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres- used.
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! Do not use sling type towing equipment. Damage to

the fascia and air dam may result.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER

CAUTION!
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground) If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
Automatic Transaxle ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not in
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi- the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions.
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be towed must not exceed 15 miles (25 km), If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
and the towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 (wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
km/h). If the transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km), the vehicle transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground. 6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 ▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
䡵 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 ▫ Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 203 ▫ Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 7
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 224
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Fuel System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
200 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Fog Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Center Stoplight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 241
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Rear Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution
▫ License Plate Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Headlight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Park, Turn Signal, Sidemarker Bulb
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 201
2.4L ENGINE
2.4L Engine Compartment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2.7L ENGINE
2.7L Engine Compartment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not 7
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
PROGRAMS
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. 3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the 4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, bulb check.
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
for testing.
happen:
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
should not proceed to the I/M station.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully REPLACEMENT PARTS
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled main-
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD tenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
station. use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was DEALER SERVICE
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
you may need to do nothing more than drive your tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine include detailed service information for your vehicle.
may then indicate that the system is now ready. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is yourself. 7
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M against you.
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level
You can be badly injured working on or around a To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which engine oil must be maintained, at the correct level. Check
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent The best time to check the oil level is about 5 minutes
mechanic. after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting
the engine after it has sat overnight.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
services determined by the engineers who designed your dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
vehicle. the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed engines.
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Change Engine Oil

Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
• Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C)
• Stop and Go driving
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
Engine Oil Dipstick • More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C) 7
CAUTION!
• Trailer towing
Overfilling or underfilling will cause aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. • Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)
• Off— road or desert operation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
fuel. Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
been certified by the American
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
Petroleum Institute (API). We
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
only recommend API Certified en-
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
gine oils that meet the require-
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil ments of DaimlerChrysler’s Mate-
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Mainte- rial Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar
nance Schedules⬙ section of this manual. or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, we recommend engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler’s Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mo-
par or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-
6395.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) Flexible Fuel Engine Oil

If you operate the vehicle on E-85 fuel either full or
part-time, use only Mopar Flexible Fuel 5W-30 engine oil
or an equivalent that meets the manufacturers Standard
MS-9214. Equivalent commercial Flexible Fuel engine oils
may be labeled as Flexible Fuel (FFV) or Alternate Fuel
(AFV). These engine oils may be satisfactory if they meet
the manufacturer’s standard.
CAUTION!
If Flexible Fuel engine oil is not used when using
Engine Oil Fill Cap
E-85, engine wear may be increased significantly. 7
This may void your warranty.
SAE 5W-20 and SAE 5W-30 engine oils are recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. These engine
oils are designed to improve low temperature starting Synthetic Engine Oils
and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to the engine oil filler You may use synthetic engine oils provided that the
cap for the preferred engine oil viscosity grade for each recommended oil quality requirements are met and the
vehicle. recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter
changes are followed.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Materials Added To Engine Oils Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi- At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can quired, adjust the belts according to the specifications
present a problem to the environment. Contact your and procedures shown in the Service Manual.
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
Special tools are required to properly measure tension
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
your area.
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
Engine Oil Filter between the belts and other engine components.
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
Spark Plugs
oil change.
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
Engine Oil Filter Selection mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
All manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos- stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only plug. Check the specifications section for the proper type
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient of spark plug for use in your vehicle.
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Catalytic Converter

Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con- catalyst as an emission control device.
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
Schedule “B”.
portant to keep the engine properly serviced to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
WARNING! damage.
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air CAUTION!
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your 7
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
serious personal injury. ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
Engine Fuel Filter
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
vehicle.
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over Engine Timing Belt
materials that can burn. Such materials might be Replace the engine timing belt (2.4L Only) at the intervals
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex- described in the appropriate maintenance schedule.
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any- Crankcase Emission Control System
thing that can burn. Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the Positive Crankshaft Ventilation
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
(PCV) valve and passages may accumulate deposits. If a
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
valve is not working properly, replace it with a new
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
VALVE!
Service, to the manufacturer’s specifications, should be
obtained immediately. Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
Maintenance-Free Battery
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
motion.
periodic maintenance required.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind WARNING!

the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
in the engine compartment for jump starting. tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery
fluid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immedi-
ately with large amounts of water. Battery gas is
flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks
away from the battery. Don’t use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output greater than
12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to touch each
7
other.
Battery Location
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
through the condenser as required. Fabric front fascia

CAUTION!
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing
It is essential when replacing the cables on the air conditioning performance.
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the WARNING!
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
clamps after tightening. If a “fast charger” is used flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
starting voltage as battery damage can result. further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
Air Conditioner under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
Check the air conditioning system at the start of the injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
warm weather season. or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with
a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling WARNING!

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro- Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts,
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities overfill. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
using recovery and recycling equipment. fluid.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be 7
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
“DaimlerChrysler Dealership”.
Before removing the reservoir cap, wipe the outside of
the cap and reservoir so that no dirt can fall into the
reservoir. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fluid level should be maintained at the proper level underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
indicated on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
fluid to restore the proper indicated level. With a clean
Hood Latch
cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to
When performing other under hood services, the hood
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for
latch release mechanism and safety catch should be
correct fluid type.
inspected, cleaned, and lubricated.
Suspension Ball Joints
It is important to maintain proper lubrication to insure
There are two upper front and rear suspension ball joints.
that the hood mechanisms work properly and safely.
Inspect these ball joints whenever under vehicle service is
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, NLGI Grade 2, should be ap-
done. If the seals are damaged, the ball joint should be
plied sparingly to all pivot and sliding contact areas.
replaced.
External Lock Cylinders
Body Mechanism Lubrication
Lubricate the external lock cylinders twice a year, prefer-
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
ably in the fall and spring. Apply a small amount of
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant di-
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
rectly into the lock cylinder (avoid excess lubricant).
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
Insert the key into the lock cylinder and rotate from the
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
unlocked to the locked position; without adding more
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
lubricant. Repeat this procedure three or four times. Wipe
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
all the lubricant off the key with a clean cloth, to avoid
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
soiling clothing.
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If you use a lubricant that cannot be dispensed directly Smooth White Body Lubricant - Such as Mopar
into the lock cylinder, apply a small amount of the Spray White Lube:
lubricant to the key. Insert the key into the lock cylinder,
• Hood hinge springs and links
then proceed as described above, to distribute the lubri-
cant within the lock cylinder. Pay attention to trunk • Lock cylinders
hinges, especially during cold weather, to ensure ease of
• Parking brake mechanism
trunk operation.
• Trunk latches
Other Body Mechanisms
The following body mechanisms should be inspected • Ash tray
and, if necessary, all pivot and sliding contact areas of
Windshield Wiper Blades
these components should be lubricated with the lubricant
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
specified as follows:
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
Engine Oil mild non abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- 7
tions of salt or road film.
• Door hinges
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
• Hood hinges
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
• Trunk hinges washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

• Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
• Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assem-
bly away from the wiper arm. Gently place the wiper
arm on the windshield.
• Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator anti- Washer Fluid Reservoir
freeze) rated not to freeze at -25°F (-31°C). Operate the WARNING!
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Exhaust System WARNING!

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
system. monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
low the preceding safety tips.
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri- 7
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cooling System applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the

system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
Inspection
coolant.
WARNING! Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of

bugs, leaves, etc. Clean the radiator by gently spraying
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- water from a garden hose at the back of the core.
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition key Check the recovery bottle tank tubing for condition and
to the OFF position. The fan is controlled by both tightness of connections at the bottle. Inspect the entire
the temperature of the engine cooling system and system for leaks.
the pressure in the air conditioning system and
can start at any time the ignition key is in the ON
position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or cap is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where Coolant Recovery Bottle (2.7L Engine Shown)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not remove the cap when the cooling system is hot.

CAUTION!
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules, • Mixing of coolants other than specified engine
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled. The coolant, may result in engine damage, and de-
first change should not be required until 5 years or crease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
100,000 miles (160,000 km), whichever comes first. The ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
coolant should be flushed and changed every two years emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
or 36,000 miles (57,600 km) thereafter. fied coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable
antifreeze products. Do not use additional rust
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to
compatible with the radiator coolant and may
remove all deposits and chemicals. Used automotive
antifreeze is a recyclable commodity. Discard or recycle
plug the radiator. 7
as facilities exist in your area. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
Selection Of Coolant lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct coolant type.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Adding Coolant WARNING!

When adding coolant, or refilling the system, a minimum
solution of 50% recommended HOAT ethylene glycol The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water should be cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if Never add coolant when the engine is overheated.
temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-
heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
or under pressure.
the vehicle is operated.
Coolant Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the CAUTION!
radiator from the coolant reserve tank. Be sure to use only the cooling system pressure cap
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any specified for your vehicle. Use of any other pressure
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. cap may result in decreased engine cooling system
performance and/or damage to your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. Heater
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated performance may also be adversely affected by low
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your coolant levels.
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
not overfill. Special procedures are required when filling
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals or
the engine cooling system of the 2.7L Engine. See your
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
authorized dealer for details.
immediately.
Points to Remember
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
engine off and cold, the coolant level should be between of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of 7
the “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of the coolant moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulat-
bottle. Some darkening of the coolant bottle will occur ing on the radiator and being vaporized when the
over time. This is normal. If the coolant level is hard to thermostat opens, allowing hot water to enter the radia-
see, jostling the coolant bottle will make it easier to see. tor.
There is no need to remove the radiator cap unless If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
checking for coolant freeze point, adding, or replacing evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Check coolant freeze point in the system. Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
level in the bottle does not drop when the engine cools,
brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions,
the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rub-
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT ethylene ber.
glycol engine coolant (minimum) and distilled water
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
for proper corrosion protection of your engine which
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
contains aluminum components.
routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hoses moving component that may cause heat damage or
are not kinked or obstructed. mechanical wear.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle has Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean, collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps
also. and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks
are present. Components should be replaced immedi-
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
cause failure.
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas Brakes
mileage, and increased emissions. In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in section 8.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,

and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
possible brake damage. You may not have your full operation) should be noted before hose is replaced based
braking capacity in an emergency. on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done
Brake and Power Steering System Hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance, oil change.
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, WARNING! 7
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
attention should be made to examining those hose sur- You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
faces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
manifold. hoses replaced immediately.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Master Cylinder Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid, refer

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
when performing under hood services, or immediately if for correct fluid type.
the brake system warning lamp shows system failure.
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid or that is
unidentified as to DOT FMVSS specification may
result in sudden brake failure during hard or pro-
longed braking. You could have an accident.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
Brake Fluid Reservoir spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before brake fluid catching fire.
removing the cap. If necessary, fill brake fluid reservoir to
the top of the fill mark chevron. With disc brakes, fluid
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the Selection of Lubricant

brake fluid as seal damage will result! It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
Fuel System Hoses
mance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmis-
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
sion fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and
designed with hoses and clamps which have unique
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that
material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and
the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed
resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
level using the recommended fluid.
You are urged to use only manufacturer specified hoses
and clamps, or their equivalent in material and specifi-
cation, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to CAUTION!
replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
during service. Care should be taken in installing new
clamps to insure they are properly torqued.
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration 7
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
Automatic Transmission shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
Your front wheel drive vehicle has a transmission and manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
differential assembly contained within a single housing. more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
This is referred to as a “Transaxle.” Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level • If the fluid is hot (180°F / 82°C), the reading should be
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be in the cross hatched area marked ”HOT” (between the
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with upper two holes in the dipstick).
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
• If the fluid level shows low, add sufficient transmis-
transaxle and of the fluid.
sion fluid to bring to the proper level.
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
following procedure must be used:
CAUTION!
• The vehicle must be on level ground.
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
• The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
minimum of 60 seconds.
from entering the transaxle after checking or replen-
• Fully apply parking brake. ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
seated properly.
• Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK).
Fluid and Filter Changes
• Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
Remove dipstick and note reading. changed as follows:
• If the fluid is cold (80°F / 27°C), the reading should be Maintenance schedule “A” — No change necessary.
in the cross hatched area marked “COLD” (between
the lower two holes in the dipstick). Maintenance schedule “B” — Every 60,000 miles (96 000
km) change fluid and filter under the following condi-
tions:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for lubricant has become contaminated with water. If con-
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. taminated with water, the fluid should be changed im-
mediately.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for mainte-
nance schedules. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
and filter should be changed. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Special Additives
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
any fluid additives to the transaxle. The only exception to
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme 7
avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
Fluid Level Check have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid body protection.
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
point not more than 4.0 mm below the bottom of the hole.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
resistance built into your vehicle.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
What Causes Corrosion? • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. finish.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. CAUTION!
• Stone and gravel impact. Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Special Care
Washing • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve- a month.
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and rear deck lid be kept
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu- clear and open.
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
• Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch considered the responsibility of the owner.
the paint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches or chips as Never use cleaners that contain acid, oven cleaners or
soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to any abrasive metal cleaner as they will cause perma-
match the color of your vehicle. nent staining and/or corrosion.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective deicer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. packaged and sealed.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ity of the owner.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Aluminum wheels should be cleaned regularly with
Interior Care
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and
heavy soil, select a non abrasive, non acidic cleaner. Do
carpeting.
not use scouring pads or metal polishes. Avoid auto-
matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl or leather uphol- 7
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective fin- stery.
ish.
Mopar Vinyl Cleaner is specifically recommended for
• Your painted and chrome aluminum wheels should be vinyl trim.
treated as you would treat the finish on your car.
Use mild (Ivory Flake) solution to clean all surfaces. Wipe
Always use a soft non-abrasive cloth with a mild dish
with clear water and soft (lint free) cloth.
washing soap and water when cleaning your wheels.
Never use scouring pads, steel wool or a bristle brush. Do not use cleaners, conditioners and protectants con-
taining silicon or bleach as these may cause gloss level
increases and/or discoloration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
You should not increase the gloss level, especially on top Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a
of the instrument panel top surface. Higher gloss levels damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an
will increase the reflectivity in the windshield that could abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be
decrease visibility under bright light driving conditions. removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total
WARNING! Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking the leather
with any liquid.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Cleaning Headlights
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
CAUTION! reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Never use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean the lowed by rinsing.
leather. The leather has already been pretreated. The Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
application of any leather conditioner may damage wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
the factory applied top coat.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru- molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
ments which may scratch the elements. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Instrument Panel Cover • Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
protectants or other products which may cause undesir- rag.
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
• Dry with a soft tissue.
low glare surface.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Cleaning Wood Trim
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
Your vehicle’s wood trim requires no specific mainte-
nance. Your wood trim can be cleaned as needed using
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. 7
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
regularly available automotive interior cleaning and pro-
tecting products. Using a mild soap and water solution is If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
also acceptable. Excess cleaning materials should be lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
wiped dry with a soft terry cloth. Any harsh detergents, vehicle to wash them.
abrasives, abrasive cleaners, cleansers, or chemicals
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
should be avoided, as these will damage the wood trim.
buckles do not work properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FUSES A Power Distribution Center is located in the engine

compartment; near the air cleaner. This information ap-
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
plies to vehicles built without the fuse and relay num-
bering embossed on the Power Distribution Center Top
Cover.
Interior Fuses
Fuse Panel Cover

The fuse access panel is behind the end cover at the left
side of the instrument panel. To remove the panel, pull it
out, as shown.
Power Distribution Center
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The identity of each fuse is indicated on the backside of Cavity Fuse Circuit
the cover. 6 10 Amp Heated Rear Window Indica-
Cavity Fuse Circuit Red tor
1 30 Amp Blower Motor 7 20 Amp Instrument cluster illumina-
Green Yellow tion, Park and tail Lights
2 10 Amp Right High Beam Headlight, 8 20 Amp Power Receptacle, Horns, Igni-
Red High Beam Indicator Yellow tion, Fuel, Start
3 10 Amp Left High Beam Headlight 9 15 Amp Power Door Lock Motors
Red Blue (Body Control Module)
4 15 Amp Power Door Lock Switch Illu- 10 20 Amp Daytime Running Light Mod-
Blue mination, Transmission Range Yellow ule (Canada)
Switch, Daytime Running 11 10 Amp Instrument Cluster, Transmis-
Light Module (Canada), Power Red sion Control, Park/Neutral 7
Windows, Anti-lock Brake Sys- Switch, Body Control Module
tem Module
12 10 Amp Left Low beam Headlight
5 10 Amp Power Door Lock and Door Red
Red Lock Arm/Disarm Switches,
13 20 Amp Right Low Beam Headlight,
Vanity, Reading, Map, Rear
Yellow Fog Light Switch
Seating, Ignition, and Trunk
Lights, Illuminated Entry, Ra- 14 10 Amp Radio
dio, Power Antenna, Data Red
Link Connector, Body Control
Module, Power Amplifier
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cavity Fuse Circuit VEHICLE STORAGE

15 10 Amp Turn Signal and Hazard Flash- If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
Red ers, Wiper Switch, Seat Belt days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
Control Module, Wiper Relays, You may:
Rear Window Defroster Relay • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
16 10 Amp Airbag Control Module
Red • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
17 10 Amp Airbag Control Module service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
18 20 Amp Power Seat Switch, Remote air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
C/BRKR Trunk Release in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
19 30 Amp Power Windows
C/BRKR possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it shows a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlight Bulb Replacement
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 194 1. Open the hood and remove the two headlight mount-
ABS Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 161 ing screws.
Fog Light Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC 161
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Reading/Map Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Trunk Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Climate Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC161
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number

Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007
7
Park/Turn Signal (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Side / Marker (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880L
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Back Up Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Center Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
License Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2825
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Remove the push-in fasteners by prying under the 3. Gently pry the headlight assembly away from the
head of the fasteners with a flat bladed tool. fender as shown in the picture. This will free the ball stud
from its retainer in the fender. Pull the headlight assem-
bly away from the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise and remove 6. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
the bulb and socket assembly. clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and turn the
retaining ring clockwise to secure the bulb.
8. Reinstall the headlight assembly.
Park, Turn Signal, Sidemarker Bulb Replacement
1. Open the hood and remove the two headlight assem-
bly mounting screws. Pull the headlight assembly away
from the vehicle.
7
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove the Fog Light Bulb Replacement
bulb and socket assembly.
1. Remove the screws securing the light assembly to the
front fascia.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket, replace the bulb, and
reinstall the bulb and socket to the headlight assembly.
2. Pull the light assembly away from the vehicle to
Reinstall the headlight assembly.
expose the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb and
socket assembly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Turn the bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise Center Stoplight Bulb Replacement
to remove it from the housing.
1. Open the trunk. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
to remove it from the housing.
7
5. Install the new bulb and socket assembly, reattach the
wiring connector, and reinstall the fog light assembly.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket, replace the bulb and
reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Light Bulb Replacement 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing. Remove and replace the bulb then
1. Open the trunk and pull the trunk liner away to
reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
expose the wiring connector and light housing plastic
retainers. 4. Reinstall the light housing and reconnect the wiring
connector. Push the trunk liner back into place.
License Plate Bulb Replacement
1. Locate both small slots on the outboard side of the
license lamp. Using a small screwdriver, remove the
entire housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace
the bulb and snap it back into place on the housing of the
chrome appliqué.
2. Disconnect the wiring connector and remove the plas-

tic retainers. Remove the light housing from the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlight Aiming FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

The headlights on your new vehicle were aimed at the U.S. Metric
factory. The factory setting was made at a no load setting. Fuel (approximate)
A great increase in weight will change the aiming and it
2.4 and 2.7 Liter Engines (87 16 Gallons 61 Liters
may be necessary to readjust the headlights if carrying an Octane)
excessive amount of weight in the trunk, rear seats or
Engine Oil-With Filter
pulling a trailer. To readjust the headlights first mark the
position of the headlights on a wall prior to loading the 2.4 and 2.7 Liter Engines (Re- 5 qts. 4.7 Liters
fer to the engine oil fill cap
vehicle. Load the vehicle and then readjust the headlights
for the correct SAE grade)
to the original position. If any further adjustments are
necessary contact your manufacturer’s dealer. A detailed Cooling System *
service procedure is contained in the manufacturer’s 2.4 Liter Engines* (Mopar威 8 qts. 7.5 Liters
Service Manual. Information on purchasing a Service Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
Manual can be found at the back of this Owner’s Manual.
100,000 Mile Formula) 7
2.7 Liter Engines (Mopar威 9.5 qts. 9.0 Liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes 1 qt. for coolant tank.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 and SAE 5W-30 are recommended.
Refer to the engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label under the engine
hood.
Oil Filter (2.4L Engine) Mopar威 Oil Filter (P/N 4105409) or equivalent.
Oil Filter (2.7L Engine) Mopar威 Oil Filter (P/N 5281090) or equivalent.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transaxle Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 Brake Fluid DOT 3 Motor Vehicle.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Steering Gear & Linkage, Ball Mopar威 Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2.
Joints, Prop Shafts & Yokes, Wheel
Bearings
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 246 ▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
S
䡵 Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV) For 2.4L — ▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 C
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 H
E
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M 246 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV) for 2.4L —
N
T The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold If Equipped
E type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
N NOTE: If the 8th digit of the vehicle identification
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
A number (VIN) contains a ⬙J⬙ then your vehicle is
N control system. These, and all other maintenance services
equipped with the Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle (PZEV)
C included in this manual, should be done to provide best
E package in order to meet the state of California’s PZEV
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
emissions standard.
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D Inspection and service also should be done any time a
U
L malfunction is suspected.
E
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
8 may be performed by any automotive repair establish-
ment or individual using any automotive part which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
Vehicle Identification Number
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 247 M
A
NOTE: There are specific instructions regarding when • Trailer towing.〫 I
N
to change the ignition cables and spark plugs with the
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- T
PZEV package in this section. This applies to both E
vice).〫 N
maintenance schedule A and B and will be marked with
A
an ** or ***. • Off-road or desert operation. N
C
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) E
fuel.
There are two maintenance schedules that show the S
required service for your vehicle. NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your C
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 3 months, H
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated E
whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the D
under the conditions that are listed below and at the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this manual. U
beginning of the schedule. L
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and E
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C). replace the engine coolant every 100,000 miles (160,000 S
• Stop and go driving. km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow 8
schedule B of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this
• Extensive engine idling. manual.
• Driving in dusty conditions. NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km). listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C). operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ⬙B⬙.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M 248 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
N
T tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the required.
E interval that occurs first.
N Once a Month
A NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
N • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
intervals exceed 6 months or 6,000 miles, whichever
C damage.
E comes first.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
S as required.
C CAUTION!
H • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
E
D Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder, and transaxle and add as needed.
U may result in damage to the vehicle.
L • Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
E operation.
S At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
8 • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully proper fit.
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 249 M
A
At Each Oil Change • Check the brake master cylinder fluid level. I
N
• Change the engine oil filter. • Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps. T
E
• Inspect the exhaust system. NOTE: In 2.7L Engines equipped with Flex Fuel Engine N
A
(FFV), change engine oil every 5 months or 5,000 miles, N
• Inspect the brake linings, hoses and calipers.
whichever comes first. This applies to both Maintenance C
• Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension Schedule A and B. E
components. S
C
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level. H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M 250 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I SCHEDULE “B” • Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser-
N
T Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle vices).〫
E under one or more of the following conditions. Change
N • Off-road or desert operation.
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
A
N miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
C one or more of the conditions marked with an 〫. fuel.
E
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C). NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
S engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
C • Stop and go driving.
H whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
E • Extensive engine idling. ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
D
U • Driving in dusty conditions. NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and
L replace the engine coolant every 100,000 miles (160,000
E • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
S km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high schedule B of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this
8 speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C). manual.
• Trailer towing.〫
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SCHEDULE “B” 251 M
A
I
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000 N
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (14 000) (19 000) (24 000) (29 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X X N
replaced at 3 months. A
N
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X X C
necessary.* E
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X
S
rotors, rear drums and shoes. C
Rotate the tires. X X X H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000
T (Kilometers) (34 000) (38 000) (43 000) (48 000) (53 000) (58 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X X
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if re- X X X X X
E quired.*
Replace the air cleaner filter. X
S
C Inspect and check tension for power steering X
H belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if re-
E quired.
D
U Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X X
L rotors, rear drums and shoes.
E Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV X
S
valve. *
8 Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. ** X
Rotate the tires. X X X
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000 N
(Kilometers) (62 000) (67 000) (72 000) (77 000) (82 000) (86 000) T
E
N
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X X C
necessary.* E
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X
S
rotors, rear drums and shoes. C
Rotate the tires. X X X H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000
T (Kilometers) (91 000) (96 000) (101 000) (106 000) (110 000) (115 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re- X X X X X X
A placed at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if neces- X X X X X
E sary.*
S
C Inspect and check tension for power steering belt X
H (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if required.
E
D Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, ro- X X
U tors, rear drums and shoes.
L Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter engine. ** X
E
S Replace the accessory drive belts on the 2.7 liter X
engine.
8
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter engine. ** X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡ X
Change the automatic transmission fluid and fil- X
ter.〫
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if X
not done at 100,000 miles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000 N
(Kilometers) (120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000) (144 000) T
E
N
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X C
necessary.* E
S
Inspect and check tension for power steering X C
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if re- H
quired. E
D
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter X U
engine. * L
E
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X S
rotors, rear drums and shoes.
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. ** X
8
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV X
valve. *‡
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 100,000 102,000 105,000
T (Kilometers) (149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000) (168 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X
E necessary.*
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter en- X
S
C gine. ***
H Replace the ignition cables on the 2.4 liter en- X
E gine. ***
D
U Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X
L rotors, rear drums and shoes.
E
S Replace the spark plugs on the 2.7 liter en- X
gine.
8
Check and retension accessory drive belts on X
2.7 liter engine.
Replace the accessory drive belts on 2.4 liter X
engine.
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not X
replaced at 60 months.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000 123,000 N
(Kilometers) (174 000) (179 000) (183 000) (188 000) (193 000) (198 000) T
E
N
necessary.* E
S
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter en- X C
gine. ** H
E
Replace the ignition cables on the 2.4 liter en- X D
gine. ** U
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X X L
E
rotors, rear drums and shoes. S
Replace the accessory drive belts on 2.7 liter X 8
engine.
valve. *
Change the automatic transmission fluid and X
filter.〫
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 X
months, if not done at 100,000 miles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N Miles 126,000 129,000 132,000 135,000 138,000 141,000
T (Kilometers) (203 000) (208 000) (212 000) (217 000) (222 000) (227 000)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not X X X X X X
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X X
E necessary.*
Inspect and check tension for power steering X
S
C belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if re-
H quired.
E Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X
D rotors, rear drums and shoes.
U
L Rotate the tires. X X X
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
Miles 144,000 147,000 150,000 N
(Kilometers) (232 000) (237 000) (241 000) T
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at 3 X X X N
months. A
N
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if necessary.* X X C
Replace the air cleaner filter. X E
Replace the spark plugs on the 2.4 liter engine. ** X S
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, rotors, rear drums X C
and shoes. H
E
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡ X D
Rotate the tires. X U
L
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture ‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced. E
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis- S
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
sions warranty.
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
8
** Except for the 2.4 liter Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle ceipts.
(PZEV).
*** 2.4 liter PZEV only.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M 260 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I SCHEDULE “A”
N
T Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000
E
N (Kilometers) (10 000) (19 000) (29 000) (38 000) (48 000) (58 000)
A [Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
E Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X
S necessary.*
C Replace the air cleaner filter. X
H
E Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. ** X
D Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X X
U rotors, rear drums and shoes.
L
E Rotate the tires. X X X X X X
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SCHEDULE “A” 261 M
A
I
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 N
(Kilometers) (67 000) (77 000) (86 000) (96 000) (106 000) (115 000) T
E
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X A
N
required.* E
Replace the air cleaner filter. X S
Inspect and check tension for power steering X C
belt (2.4 Liter Engine). Adjust or replace if re- H
E
quired. D
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X X U
rotors, rear drums and shoes. L
E
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. ** X S
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 X 8
valve. *
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter en- X
gine. **
Replace the accessory drive belts in 2.7 liter X
engine.
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N Miles 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 100,000 102,000 105,000
T (Kilometers) (125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (160 000) (163 000) (168 000)
E
N [Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102] [105]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace X X X X
E if required.*
S Replace the air cleaner filter. X
C Inspect the front and rear brake pads, X
H linings, rotors, rear drums and shoes.
E
D Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter en- X
U gine. **
L
E Replace the spark plugs on 2.7 liter en- X
S gine.
8 Check and replace, if necessary, the X
PCV valve. *‡
Check and retension alternator drive X
belts on 2.7 liter engine.
Replace the accessory drive belts on X
2.4L engine.
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter X
engine. ***
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
Miles 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 100,000 102,000 105,000 N
(Kilometers) (125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (160 000) (163 000) (168 000) T
E
[Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102] [105] N
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter en- X A
N
gine. *** C
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if X E
not replaced at 60 months.
S
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000
T (Kilometers) (174 000) (183 000) (193 000) (203 000) (212 000) (222 000)
E
N [Months] [108] [114] [120] [126] [132] [138]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if X X X X X
E required.*
S Replace the air cleaner filter. X
C Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, X X
H rotors, rear drums and shoes.
E
D Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. ** X
U Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV X
L
E valve. *‡
S Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter X
8 engine.**
Replace the accessory drive belts in 2.7 liter X
engine.
Replace the ignition cables on 2.4 liter en- X
gine. **
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
Miles 144,000 150,000 N
(Kilometers) (232 000) (241 000) T
E
[Months] [144] [150] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X A
N
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.* X C
Replace the air cleaner filter. X E
Inspect the front and rear brake pads, linings, rotors, rear drums and shoes. X S
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡ X C
H
Replace the engine timing belt on 2.4 liter engine.*** X E
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4 liter engine. ** X D
U
Rotate the tires. X X L
E
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture Inspection and service should also be performed anytime S
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis- a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
sions warranty. ceipts.
8
** Except for the 2.4 liter Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
(PZEV).
*** 2.4 liter PZEV only.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I
N WARNING!
T
E You can be badly injured working on or around a
N
A motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
N you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
C you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
S chanic.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
268 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
YOUR VEHICLE to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
work to be performed may not be covered by the your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service products and services.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
current problem. Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They
Prepare A List know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the that you get prompt and high quality service. The
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
service advisor know. assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
Be Reasonable With Requests manner.
If you list a number of items, and you must have your This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. this process.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 269
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
general manager or owner of the dealership. They P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center. In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Center should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
• Dealership name
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
• Vehicle identification number To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
Center has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
9
P.O. Box 21–8004 (TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Phone: (800) 992-1997
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service Contract We appreciate that you have made a major investment

You may have purchased a service contract for your when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex- also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be- your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will concerns.
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery WARRANTY INFORMATION
date. If you have any questions about your service See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na- for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922. warranty.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S. ONLY
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MOPAR姞 PARTS Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also

Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your the Hotline.
vehicle operating at its best.
In Canada:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately defect to the Canadian government should write to
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra- Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy To order the following manuals, you may use either the
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
manufacturer. cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash- NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Service Manuals. • Owner’s Manuals.

These comprehensive service manuals provide the These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
information that students and professional technicians of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
and charts.
(Canada)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Or
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer- www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability 9
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades

TIRE QUALITY GRADES The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
The following describes the tire grading categories estab- C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis- pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
of the tires on your car. mance.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades. WARNING!
Treadwear The traction grade is based on braking (straight-
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con- (turning) performance.
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Temperature Grades WARNING!

The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, repre-
senting the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and The temperature grade is established for a tire that is
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive and possible tire failure.
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
278 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 222 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . 221,222,243
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Aiming Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . 211 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Anti-Theft Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,133 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . 132,138 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,18
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,214 Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,149,227,244
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,38 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,38,40,49,90 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,148
Airbag, Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,39 Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,244
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 279
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . 147,149

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 48
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,239
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . 243
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,213 Caps, Filler
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 22 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,213 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Belts, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Carpeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 124
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,109,112
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,224 CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,113,118,120
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,114,116,124 10
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Central Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
280 INDEX
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Check Engine Light Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,43,45,46 Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,223
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Cleaning Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Wood Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Rubber and Plastic Components . . . . . . . . . . 224
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,243,244
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Compact Disc Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . 212
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,106 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 281
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . 65 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Emergency, In Case of
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,130,135 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,25
Dipsticks Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 204,246
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,202
Disposal Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Door Ajar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,202
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,244
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Driving Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 10
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,243
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,243,244
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,243
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
282 INDEX
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,209

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle for 2.4 Liter . . 246 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,177,219 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Exterior Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Filters Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,244 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Flashers Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,92,240
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Flexible Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 283
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,21
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,243 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,91
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . 68
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 10
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,133
Gauges Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Hood Latch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
284 INDEX
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,227 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,89 LATCH
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 45
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Latches
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,216
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,64
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,40,49,90
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,151
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 285
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,68 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . 91
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Exterior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,92,240 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,67,91,239
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Loading Vehicle
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,179
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Locks
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Cylinder Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 10
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
286 INDEX
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Luggage/Cargo Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Tampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,243,244
Light Duty Schedule ⬙B⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Schedule ⬙A⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Schedule ⬙B⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,204 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,244
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,208
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,208
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,243
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,272 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,243
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,204
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Operator Manuals (Owner’s Manuals) . . . . . . . . . 4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 287
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,272 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 75,78
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,75,78
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . 222
Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle for 2.4 Liter . . . . 246 Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109,114,123,126
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 160 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,109,114
Power Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 10
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
288 INDEX
Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,244
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,13
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 31 Service Engine Soon Light
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,41,46 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 289
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 34

Side Window Demisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,136 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,168 Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Temperature Control, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,90 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 92,187
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . 160
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Steering Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,215 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,164,274
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 10
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,188
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,188
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
290 INDEX
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,149,227
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,161 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Transmission
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Transaxle
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,164 Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,196,197 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,90,155 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,25
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,155 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,91
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 291
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Window Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,39

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,218
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,179 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,217
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Vinyl Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Wood Trim Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Warning, Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,218 10
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,81
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Chrysler 2005 Sebring

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chrysler 2005 Sebring

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chrysler 2005 Sebring

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

▫ To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

Ignition Key Positions

NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM WARNING!

Power Door Locks

Door Lock Plunger

WARNING! NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

Keyless Entry Transmitter

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

Trunk Internal Emergency Release WINDOWS

WARNING! Wind Buffeting

Front Airbag Components

WARNING! Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. WARNING!

• To avoid drawing exhaust gases into the vehicle, close Defrosters

▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 䡵 Electronic Speed Control— If Equipped . . . . . .71

䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped

Automatic Dimming Mirror

Electric Remote-Control Mirrors— If Equipped

Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

SEATS Reclining Bucket Seats

Lumbar Support — If Equipped

Heated Seats — If Equipped Adjustable Head Restraints

Heated Seat Switches

Folding Rear Seat WARNING!

Folding Rear Seats

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Hood Safety Catch

WARNING! Dimmer Control

LIGHTS Dome Light Position

Daytime Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped

Multi-Function Control Lever

Automatic Headlights—If Equipped Lights-on Reminder

Headlight Beam Select Switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING!

Tilt Steering Column Control

Traction Control Switch

Rolling Hills GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Reprogramming A Single Button

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING! Opening Sunroof - Manual

Sunshade Operation Sunroof Maintenance

▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 ▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — 䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER STANDARD

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM

5. Tachometer comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s

If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop WARNING!

Control Buttons US / M Button

Trip Odometer (ODO) Compass Calibration